JP6734879B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention includes an effect control means capable of displaying a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed on a display device based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting area or the second starting area. The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to a player when a display game result is a special result.

Conventionally, the first starting area is a main starting area (main area) in which entry of game balls is recommended, and the second starting area is a sub starting area (sub area) in a first gaming state (for example, left-handed state). ), and the second starting area becomes the main starting area in which the entry of the game ball is recommended, and the first starting area becomes the sub starting area, and the second game state (for example, right-handed state) can be generated. A gaming machine exists (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2017-148127, A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, when the special game state (small hit state or big hit state) occurs due to the main variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main starting area, If a special game state (a small hit state or a big hit state) occurs in the sub variable display game based on a ball entry, the interest of the game may decrease if the same effect is performed.

It is an object of the present invention to prevent a decrease in interest in games.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a presentation control capable of displaying a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed based on a game ball entering the first starting area or the second starting area on a display device. In a gaming machine that is provided with means and is capable of generating a special game state advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result, it is recommended that a game ball enters the first starting area. While the first starting area is the main area, and the second starting area is the sub area, the first game state and the entry of the game ball into the second starting area is recommended, and the second starting area is It is possible to generate a second game state in which the first starting area becomes a sub area while becoming the main area, and the effect control means causes the main variation display game based on the entry of a game ball into the main area. Can be displayed on the display device in two modes, a first display mode and a second display mode, and a slave variable display game based on entering a game ball into the slave area can be displayed on the display device. There, the the main variable display games, the it is possible to slave variable display games and both running state, the slave variable display game results Ri Do the first special result, the main variable display games If disrupting the variation time measurement temporarily, continuously variable display before Symbol the main variable display game on the second display mode, in the second game condition, the main variable display game results wherein the When the first special game state occurs due to the one special result, a blessing effect of blessing and informing the occurrence of the first special game state is executed, while in the first game state, the slave When the first special game state occurs because the result of the variable display game becomes the first special result , the blessing effect of blessing and informing the occurrence of the first special game state is not executed , In the first gaming state, when the result of the main variable display game is the second special result and when the result of the sub variable display game is the second special result, the second special result The same fanfare effect can be executed in the period after the display of .

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in a game.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a batch display device. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of various display parts of a batch display device. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of a special figure 1 indicator. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of a special figure 2 indicator. It is another figure which shows the lighting mode of the special figure 2 indicator. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game control device. It is the block diagram which shows the constitution example of the production control system of the game control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half of the main processing of game control. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the main processing of game control. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of checksum calculation processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of initial value random number updating processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an input process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of switch reading processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout command transmission process. 9 is a flowchart showing a procedure of random number update processing 1. 9 is a flowchart showing a procedure of random number update processing 2. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of winning a prize switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of fraud & prize monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of a prize number counter update processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of production command setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is a time chart explaining the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is another time chart explaining the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is still another time chart explaining the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the game machine state check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout busy signal check process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of starting opening switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure starting mouth 1 switch processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure starting opening 2 switch processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 game processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing 1 normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special processing 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 1 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a table exemplifying the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the outfall probability. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 stop design setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 stop design setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a 2-byte distribution process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of distribution processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of high probability variation frequency update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special process 1 process transition setting process during a change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 2 transition process transition setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during change in special figure 1. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure 2 change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 during a special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing shift setting processing 1 during a special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transfer setting process 2 during a special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 2 display process transfer setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the process in the process of displaying the special figure 1. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the processing during the special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the process in the process of displaying the special figure 2. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing shift setting processing during fanfare/interval. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing 1 small hit fanfare inside processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 small hit fanfare inside process shift setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during fanfare/interval. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing shift setting processing 1 during a special winning opening opening. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing shift setting processing 2 during a special winning opening opening. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during the opening of the special winning opening. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit operation shift setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit end processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 big hit ending process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during a small hit. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of small hit remaining ball processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 small hit end process. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of design fluctuation control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of segment LED edit processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of magnet fraud monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the board electric wave fraud monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of external information edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the starting opening 1 signal edit process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of main prize ball signal edit processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of a symbol fixed frequency signal edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 1 game process. It is a flow chart which shows a modification of special figure 2 game processing. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of processing during special figure 1 change. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of processing during special figure 2 change. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 1 big hit termination process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 2 big hit termination process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 1 small hit termination process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 2 small hit termination process. It is the flowchart which shows the main processing of the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows reception command check processing. It is a flow chart which shows received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows the first half of single command system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows the latter half of single-shot system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change interruption setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation restart setting process. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading symbol type command processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading variable system command processing. It is the flowchart which shows the design command processing. It is a flow chart which shows variable system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of change suspension setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation restart setting process. It is a time chart (timing chart) showing how the variable display game is forcibly terminated. It is a time chart showing how the variable display game is interrupted/restarted. (A) It is a time chart which shows the case where the variation time timer of the special figure 2 variable display game is updated when the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped. (B) It is a time chart which shows the case where it is not updated. (A) is a time chart showing how a delay timer (wait time) that delays restart of the special display 1 variable display game is not set. (B) is a time chart showing how to set a delay timer (wait time) that delays restart of the special display 2 variable display game. (A) is a time chart showing how the delay timer (wait time) of the special figure 2 variable display game is set regardless of the state of variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game. (B) is a time chart showing how a delay timer (wait time) for delaying restart of the variable display game is not set. It is a time chart which shows processing when there is a possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game will end at the same timing. It is a time chart which shows an example of a process when there is a power failure during interruption of the variable display game and the power failure is restored (power on) after that. It is a time chart which shows another example of the processing when there is a power failure during the interruption of the variable display game and the power failure is restored (power on) after that. It is a front view of a game board provided in the game machine in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the lamp display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the collective display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of various display parts which comprise the collective display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the game state transition diagram (game flow) which shows the transition of the game state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of timer interruption processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a table which illustrates a big hit probability, a small hit probability, a loss probability, and a probability variation probability in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of high probability change frequency update processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the time shortening change frequency update processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a 1st flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit termination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 2nd flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit termination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 1st flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 big hit end processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a 2nd flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 big hit end processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 small hit end processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a 1st flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 big hit termination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 2nd flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 big hit termination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 1st flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 big hit termination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 2nd flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 big hit termination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 small hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 small hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the universal figure game processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the ordinary prize winning switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal figure normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing shift setting processing during normal figure change. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during change in the figure. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during public figure display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during ordinary drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal electric power operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal electric remaining ball process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the end processing per ordinary figure. It is a time chart of the operation of the first special variation winning device in the small hit RUSH. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of hit system command processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. In the third embodiment, it is a table exemplifying the presence or absence of a small hit effect and a big hit effect for the hit of the main variable display game or the sub variable display game with respect to the normal game state (left hit state). In the third embodiment, it is a table exemplifying the presence or absence of a small hit effect and a big hit effect for the hit of the main variable display game or the sub variable display game for the small hit RUSH state (right hitting state). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure starting opening 2 switch processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 2 normal process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the change start information setting processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. In 3rd Embodiment, it is an example of the screen transition diagram (first half) which showed the display screen of the display device in time series, and is a figure which shows the case where a normal small hit and an irregular small hit occur in a normal game state. In 3rd Embodiment, it is an example of the screen transition diagram (second half) which showed the display screen of the display device in time series, and is a figure which shows the case where a normal small hit and an irregular small hit occur in a normal game state. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the other example 1 of an irregular small hit. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows example 2 of an irregular small hit. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows example 3 (switching production 1) of irregular small hit. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows example 4 (switching production 2) of irregular small hit. Regarding the third embodiment, it is an example of a screen transition diagram (first half) showing the display screen of the display device in a time series, and in the small hit RUSH state (second specific game state), a normal small hit and an irregular small hit are shown. It is a figure which shows the case where it occurs. Regarding the third embodiment, it is an example of a screen transition diagram (second half) showing the display screen of the display device in a time series, and in the small hit RUSH state (second specific game state), a normal small hit and an irregular small hit are shown. It is a figure which shows the case where it occurs. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of hit system command processing concerning the modification of a 3rd embodiment. In the modification of the third embodiment, it is a table exemplifying the presence or absence of a small hit effect and a big hit effect with respect to the hit of the main variable display game or the sub variable display game with respect to the normal game state (left hit state). In the modification of the third embodiment, it is a table exemplifying the presence or absence of a small hit effect and a big hit effect for the hit of the main variable display game or the sub variable display game for the small hit RUSH state (right hitting state). In the modification of 3rd Embodiment, it is an example of the screen transition diagram (first half) which showed the display screen of the display device in time series.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed by the player who is playing the game.

[First Embodiment]
[Overall view of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a game machine.

The gaming machine 10 includes an opening/closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable/closable via a hinge. The open/close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front surface frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that allows the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 to be visually recognized.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 7) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30. You can

Various frame components are arranged on the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

At the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, decoration devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light according to the game state are arranged. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house illumination members such as LEDs inside and perform a light-emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination members arranged inside the decoration devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 8).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit a sound effect, an alarm sound, a notification sound, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side) is provided. The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game. The illumination member arranged inside the projection effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 8).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape having an open top surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launching device (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from a player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to a game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided in the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is intervened in the special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2 ). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to the special figure variable display game.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device during non-execution.

The gaming state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special game state, for example, a specific game state (time saving state) or a state in which a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a variable display game (probability change state, probability change state), big hit state (special game state) , Is a small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability change state is one that continues until the next big hit (loop type), one that continues until a predetermined number of times of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and a predetermined probability falling lottery. There are things that continue until you win (falling lottery type).

Furthermore, without determining whether or not to generate a probability variation state by a big hit symbol random number, it is possible to always generate a probability variation state when a big hit occurs, or to provide a winning device or the like with a specific area to specify. The probability change state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

The decoration device 22 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED inside and is a device for performing a light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided in a front portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 8 ).

Below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. The lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is arranged on the lower right side of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player turns the operation handle 24, the ball launching device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The launch speed of the game ball launched from the ball launch device is set to increase as the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device can change the launching force, which is the force (speed) of launching the game ball in the game area, in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be performed in various launching modes with different launching forces. You can fire a ball. The launch mode includes left hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting in which the game ball falls down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a that vertically penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball removing hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball removing hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to shoot a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails and the like are arranged as members for converting the flow direction of the game balls, and the launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area of the variable display game is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information is disposed behind the window formed in the center case 40. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may be one having a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and in each variable display area, identification information (special symbols) and a character that produces a variable display game are displayed. In addition, images (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) based on the progress of the game are displayed on the display screen.

Further, the center case 40 is provided with a warp passage 40a for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage portion 40b on which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40a can roll. Has been. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is the first starting winning opening 36 or the first starting winning opening 36. 2 It is easy to win the start winning hole 37.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 8) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 8).

The general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left gaming area 32 of the center case 40, and the general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into these general winning openings 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 7) provided in the general winning openings 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a first starting winning opening (first starting winning area, special drawing 1 starting opening, starting opening 1) 36 for giving a starting condition (starting condition) of the special figure variation display game 36. Is provided. At the time of left-handed hitting (normal hitting), it becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize (ball) to the first start winning opening 36. In the game area 32 on the lower right of the center case 40, a second start winning opening (second starting winning area, special figure 2 starting opening, starting opening 2) 37 is provided. When hitting to the right, it becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize (ball) to the second starting winning opening 37. When the game ball wins the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37, the special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

In the game area 32 below the second start winning hole 37, an attacker type which opens the lower winning hole by rotating the upper end side toward the front side by the lower winning hole solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7) A first special variation winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an opening/closing door 38c is provided. The first special variation winning device 38 converts the state in which the special winning opening is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a gaming state that is advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the special winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, in the lower special winning opening, a lower special winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 7) is provided as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening.

Further, in the game area 32 on the upper left side of the center case 40, the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 7) is rotated in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side to open the upper special winning opening. A second special variation winning device 39 (special electric accessory) having an opening/closing door 39c is provided. The second special variation winning device 39, like the first special variation winning device 38, changes from a state in which the special winning opening is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a player), depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. It is designed to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player by converting the game ball into an advantageous game state) and facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the upper special winning opening. In addition, inside the upper special winning opening, an upper special winning opening switch 39a (see FIG. 7) (two in the present embodiment) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening.

A game ball is won in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the lower special winning opening of the first special variation winning device 38, and the upper special winning opening of the second special variation winning device 39. Then, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 7) discharges the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening from the payout device to the upper plate 21. Further, in the game area 32 below the first special variation winning device 38, there is provided an outlet 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize.

Further, in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a outside the game area 32, the special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game (special figure 1 game), special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 2 A collective display device 50 for executing a game)) is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units D1 to D20 that display information such as the current game state (see FIG. 3).

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of the collective display device 50. The collective display device 50 is composed of a 7-segment type display device (LED lamp) or the like, and is a first special figure fluctuation display portion 51 (special figure 1 display device) (lamp D1) and a second special figure for a variable display game. The fluctuation display section 52 (special figure 2 display) (lamp D2) is provided. In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a round display section 53 (lamps D3 to D7) for displaying the number of rounds (number of times of opening and closing of the special variation winning devices 38, 39) at the time of a big hit, and a special figure 1 variation display. A memory display unit 54 (special figure 1 hold indicator) (lamps D11-D14) for informing the number of stored (starting) games is stored.

Further, on the collective display device 50, a first game state display section 55 (first game state indicator, probability state display section) (lamps D15-D18) that indicates that the winning probability state is a high probability state. ), when a big hit or a small hit occurs, the second gaming state display section 56 (second gaming state indicator) (lamps D8-D10) that lights up and informs that it is right-handed (when it should be right-handed) It is provided. In addition, the collective display device 50 corresponds to a modified example described later, and a third game state display unit 57 (third game state display) indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended. Device, interruption status display portion) (lamps D19, D20).

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a lighting mode of various display units 53-57 (lamps D3-D20) that form the collective display device 50. The collective display device 50 displays the state of the gaming machine corresponding to the lighting mode of the various display units 53-57. The round display unit 53 (lamps D3 to D7) is lit according to the number of rounds, and the storage display unit 54 (lamps D11 to D14) is lit according to the number of reservations (starting storage number). The first gaming state display section 55 (lamps D15-D18) lights up in a high probability state and turns off in a low probability state, and the second gaming state display section 56 (lamps D8-D10) lights up when hitting to the right, Turns off when left-handed (normal).

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10 and details of the special figure variation display game will be described. In addition, in the present embodiment, a general-purpose starting gate is not provided, and a so-called general-purpose variable display game is not executed. The second starting winning opening 37 is not provided with a movable member that opens and closes the second starting winning opening 37.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second The winning award 37, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39 is won, or it flows into the outlet 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when the game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39, the type of the winning opening won. A corresponding number of prize balls are discharged to the upper plate 21 through the payout device.

As a basic game method, in the normal game state, the player places a game ball in the first start winning opening 36 by left-handing to start the special figure 1 variable display game, and the small hit/big hit or the probability change state, etc. Due to the occurrence of, the player switches to right hitting and aims at the second starting winning opening 37 and the special winning opening. The display device 41 can display an instruction for instructing whether the player should hit left or right, and if the player does not follow the instruction, the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b notify an error. It is possible.

The winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 7) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 7). The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special display 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 in the present embodiment) and the second starting winning opening. The game ball winning in 37 is detected as a starting prize ball of the special figure 2 variable display game, and stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (1 in this embodiment).

At the time of detecting the start winning ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random value, and each variation pattern random value are extracted. These random number values are stored in a special figure reservation storage area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure starting winning memory (special figure starting memory) a predetermined number of times (for example, in the special figure 1 variable display game, the maximum value is set). It is stored up to 4 times. The memory number of the special figure 1 starting prize winning memory (special figure 1 starting memory) is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 for informing the number of starting winning prizes of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the special figure 2 variable display game can be in the execution state (running) at the same time independently of the special figure 1 variable display game. The special figure 2 starting prize is invalidated during execution of the display game or during a big hit (the detection of the starting opening 2 switch 37a is invalidated). Therefore, the special figure 2 starting prize memory (special figure 2 starting memory) is not substantially accumulated, and the special figure 2 variable display game is started immediately when the special figure 2 starting prize memory is generated. That is, when the special figure 2 variable display game is not being played at the timing when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 37, the variation start condition (starting condition) of the special figure 2 variable display game is satisfied. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 starting prize memory number is not displayed on the collective display device 50 or the display device 41. It should be noted that it is also possible to have a configuration in which the special figure 2 starting prize winning memory number is displayed on the collective display device 50 or the display device 41.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 36 or the first starting memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 37 or the second starting memory. To do.

In the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, identification information (special symbol 1 (special symbol 1), special symbol 2 (special symbol 2)) is displayed on the special symbol 1 indicator 51 and the special symbol 2 indicator 52. Is variably displayed and then a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed independently (at the same time) simultaneously (both), but one special figure variable display game is a big hit or a small hit. If it occurs (a special result or a specific result is derived and is stopped and displayed), the other special figure variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped by the outlier result.

When a game ball is won in the second start winning port 37 by right-handing in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 variable display game starts fluctuating, but basically a long time fluctuation (long fluctuation, for example, 10 minutes) Since it is performed, during this period, it is forcibly disengaged and stopped by a big hit or a small hit that occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game.

FIG. 5: is a figure which shows the lighting mode of the 7 segment type indicator (lamp D1) which comprises the Toku-zu 1 indicator 51. The special figure 1 variable display game is executed by a variable display in which the identification information (here, the central segment and the dot portion) is repeatedly turned on and off on the special figure 1 display 51. The special display 1 variable display game stop result (disappearance pattern, disengagement display) is a display in which the central segment and the dot portion are lit. Special Figure 1 variable display Stop display of the big hit result of the game (big hit design, big hit display), a plurality of displays corresponding to the number of rounds (R) of the big hit and the game state (normal state or probability changing state) after the big hit ends ( (Pattern) can exist. There are multiple types of stop display (small hit pattern, small hit display) of the small hit result of the special display 1 variable display game, but the opening pattern (open time etc.) of the big winning opening due to the small hit is the same one type ( (Special figure 1 small hit) only.

In the present embodiment, in all types of jackpots, the probability variation state continues until the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the jackpot is over. That is, the gaming machine is an ST (special time) machine, and the jackpot symbols are only probability variation symbols.

FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B are diagrams showing a lighting mode of a 7-segment type display (lamp D1) forming the special figure 2 display 52. The special figure 2 variable display game is executed by a variable display in which the identification information (here, the central segment and the dot portion) is repeatedly turned on and off on the special figure 2 display device 52. Special figure 2 variable display The stop display (disappearing pattern, disengagement display) of the disengagement result of the game is a display in which the central segment is illuminated. Special figure 2 Variable display Stop display of the big hit result of the game (big hit pattern, big hit display), a plurality of displays corresponding to the number of rounds (R) of the big hit and the game state (normal state or probability changing state) after the big hit ends ( (Pattern) can exist. There are multiple types of stop display (small hit pattern, small hit display) of the small hit result of the variable display game, and there are three types of opening patterns (open time etc.) It is 1, 2, 3) for every 2 small pieces. In addition, in the special figure 2 small hits 1, 2, and 3, the big winning opening (upper big winning opening or lower big winning opening) may be different, and depending on the small hit design, the upper big winning opening or lower big winning opening Either of them will open in a predetermined opening pattern.

Further, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variable display game.

The decorative special figure variable display game in the display device 41, for example, decorative special symbols (identification information) composed of numbers etc. are left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol) ) Is started in a variable display (scroll display) in order, and the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure variable display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as the appearance of characters are performed in order to improve the interest.

When the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), the special figure variation display game As a result, a special result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and the jackpot state (special game state) is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state where numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

In this case, the first special variation winning device 38 and/or the second special variation winning device 39 are activated by energizing the lower special winning opening solenoid (38b) and/or the upper special winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 7). The special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, several seconds or several tens of seconds). That is, the special winning opening provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 is wide open until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, the player plays many game balls. The privilege of being able to acquire is given.

When the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure variation display As a result of the game, the specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display pattern, and the small hit state is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes the small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment, but the small hit value (small hit judgment value) is different from the big hit value (big hit judgment value).

In this case, the first special variation winning device 38 and/or the second special variation winning device 39 are activated by energizing the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and/or the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 7). Is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time (for example, 2 seconds or less).

Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric role as a special electric accessory. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38 and/or second special variable winning device 39) is set. The condition device not operating means that the above-described specific flag is not set as in the case of winning the small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term that is generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variation winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variation winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

The special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 may be configured as separate display devices, and both special figure variation display games may be in the running state (running state) at the same time. When a big hit or a small hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (the special result or the specific result is derived and stopped and displayed), the other special figure variation display game being executed is forcibly defeated as a result. Stop.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In addition, the decoration special figure variable display games corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may both be in the execution state (running state) at the same time, If a big hit or a small hit occurs (the special result or the specific result is derived and stopped and displayed), the other decorative special figure variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped due to the off result.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the count switch (38a, In 39a), a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) is used which includes a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. Has been done. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 is Microswitches with specific contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in an integrated manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It includes a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillating circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to be operable. To be done.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V and DC 5V from a voltage of 32V DC. , A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the replacement target.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Further, even when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, processing for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area of various signals and random number values during game control. Used as. An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start-up memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half variation group table, second half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before reaching the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the special result mode, in the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (special gaming state), some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed, and already derived. The display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, the state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derived display, and is determined before the displayed result is derived and displayed. A display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variable display game changes a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the variable display area on the left and right, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, at the time when the variable display of all variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of left, middle, and right (for example, the same identification information May be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

Then, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and a normal effect (N reach) and a special 1 reach (SP1 reach) are provided as a reach effect system in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different). , Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when the special result mode is lost). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit compared to the case where the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the big hit random number in the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining the small hit symbol. Random pattern generation circuit for generating random numbers for patterns, fluctuation patterns in special figure variable display games (including execution time of variable display games in various reach and variable display without reach) A clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 is provided. ..

Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a causes the special figure change display game to have a game result (big hit or miss), the special figure change display game as the current game state, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state), and the number of starting memories. Based on the above, any one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111a forms a fluctuation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit according to the prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to win the prize ball. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600 to perform control for paying out the ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 has a radio wave sensor 62 (a board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start opening 1 switch 36a in the first start winning opening 36, and a second start winning opening 37. Starting port 2 switch 37a, prize opening switch 35a, first special variable winning a prize device 38 lower special winning a prize mouth switch 38a, second special variable winning a prize device 39 upper special winning a prize mouth switch 39a is connected, supplies from these switches There is provided an interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 for inputting a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V and converting it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower winning opening switch 38a, and the upper winning opening switch 39a are the third input port 124. Entered in.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, the second input port 123, the detection signal of the magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, the glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10, etc. Signals are input from the switch 63, the front frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame 12, and the like. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine and the detection signal may be input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Is becoming

The data held by the third input port 124 is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 to assert the enable signal CE2 (change to a valid level). be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow are shown. A first input port 122 is provided which takes in an overflow switch signal and a touch switch signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The frame radio wave incorrect signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12, and the payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept a command. It is a signal. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 in a predetermined amount or more (full).

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is handled as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. In addition, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured.

In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input section 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is made so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for informing the test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) of the special symbol information of the variable display game and a signal indicating the probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of the pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting port switch output from the proximity I/F 121, is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, a game machine controls the game. As an error signal indicating that the test is not possible, the error signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-inspection test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test-shooting test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-shooting test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open a solenoid (lower special winning opening solenoid) 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38, and a solenoid (upper special winning opening) for opening the second special variable winning device 39. A second output port 134 for outputting the opening/closing data of the solenoid 39b is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. The fourth output port 136 for outputting ON/OFF data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and information related to the gaming machine 10 is externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening/closing data signal of the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134 and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal. Circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal of a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line 50 on the current drawing side, and an external information signal that is supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal 71. A driver 138d is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line according to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential draws the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided not on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the main board, but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photo coupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123 and 124 are not provided.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The production control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 including an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 as with the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 is supplied with power from a program ROM 321 including a program executed by the CPU (production control program) and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and a power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of holding stored contents, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 which is a time keeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content and instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound, lights a decorative lamp, and drives the motor. And drive control of solenoids, management of production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in the parallel method, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, a synchronization signal for giving a data transmission timing. STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a waiting state for receiving interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through the command I/F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the fluctuation command, the stop information command and the like transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300, the effect control command signal (effect command) To receive as. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 has a signal level conversion function. There is.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, the board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having the LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances effect effects in cooperation with effect display on the display device 41).

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and the motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the performance accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a DC voltage of a desired level to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled by the same, and thus drives a motor and a solenoid. DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, DC5V serving as a power supply voltage of the command I/F 331, and a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker. Is configured to.

Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. In addition, in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET that drive and control the lamp and the motor). Signal) to put them in a reset state. Further, the production control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools each part of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the production control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.

Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start opening 1 switch 36a provided in the first start winning opening 36, the starting winning (starting memory) is stored, and the big hit judgment of the special figure 1 variable display game is based on the starting memory. The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is missed.

In addition, the starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the second starting winning opening 37, and based on the starting memory, the special jackpot 2 variation display game big hit determination disorder Numerical values are extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111b to judge whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is hit.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37). Make a means.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the process of setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, and also displays the special game state (big hit). State) is generated. In the process of generating the special game state, for example, the CPU 111a opens the opening/closing door 38c of the first special variation winning device 38 with the special winning opening solenoid 38b or moves the second special variation winning device 39 with the special winning opening solenoid 39b. The member 39c is opened, and control is performed to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening.

Then, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, about 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. One round is to open the special winning opening until one of the conditions is achieved, and this is repeated for a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times, 8 times, 4 times or 2 times) (cycle game) )I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening opening/closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high-probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result (a big hit result in the present embodiment) in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state (low probability state). In addition, the high probability state is determined based on the result mode of either the special figure variable display game (first special figure variable display game) or the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game). Even so, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special figure variation display game is controlled to be short. In the present embodiment, the high-probability state and the time-shortened state are configured to occur at the same time, but they can be independently generated and only one of them can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 performed at a predetermined time cycle (4 msec (millisecond) in this embodiment). That is, the game control program corresponding to the control processing of the game microcomputer 111 is composed of a main program (caller routine) corresponding to main processing and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to timer interrupt processing. ..

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. 9A and 9B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main processing (main program) executed by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flow chart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is represented by "A***" or "S***".

As shown in FIG. 9A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting interruption (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer which is the top address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when the interrupt occurs (A1002).

Then, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power-on delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power-on delay timer, the sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control device 100, which is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until the program starts normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the command is sent to the slave control device before the game control device 100 starts up first and the slave control devices (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) start up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping a command. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register or the like which is not a validity determination target) that is not a target of the RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and thus it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 can be reliably performed. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the waiting time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the waiting time, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the waiting time elapses. Need to continue. However, by reading the state before the start of the waiting time, it will be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power Can be prevented from being accepted.

When the power-on delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the process of measuring the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, two times) to check by checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 through the port and the data bus (( A1008), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. The determination is made (A1010). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to the process of determining whether the power failure monitoring signal is on in step A1009.

Further, the game control device 100, when the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks continues (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine. Wait until the power is cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1009 is "N"), that is, when the power failure has not occurred, the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1011), It is determined whether the timer value is 0 (A1012). When the value of the timer is not 0 (result of A1012 is “N”), that is, when the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”), that is, when the waiting time is over, the game control device 100 can read/write RWM (read/write) such as RAM or EEPROM. Access to the memory is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (A1014).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port that is installed in the game microcomputer 111 in advance, and is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch is turned on from the state of the first input port 122 previously read (A1016).

When the initialization switch is off (result of A1016 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data. (A1017). If it is normal (result of A1017 is "Y"), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (A1019). Then, it is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum when the power is turned off match (A1020). If the checksums match (result of A1020 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A1021 of FIG. 9B, and the process for normal recovery (recovery) from the power failure is executed.

Further, when the initialization switch is on (result of A1016 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (result of A1017 is “N”). Or, if the result of A1018 is “N”) and the checksum is not normal (the result of A1020 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1023 of FIG. 9B to execute the initialization process. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. To make.

The game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A1021). The areas to be initialized are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area (payout busy signal flag area) that stores the status of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control apparatus 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, and the status of the payout busy signal is changed. It is set to an undefined state indicating that it is not fixed.

Then, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1022), and the process of step A1028 is executed. The commands at the time of power failure recovery include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, a decorative special figure 1 hold number command indicating the number of special figure 1 held, a probability information command indicating a probability state, a command for screen designation, etc. .. The command for designating the screen is a command for designating the display contents of the display device 41. For example, when both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are normally processed (when neither variation nor hit operation). Is the command for the customer waiting demo, and in other cases it is the command for the recovery screen.

Further, in the command for power recovery, when the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted, as in a modification of FIGS. 82 to 89 described later (backed up in the RWM In the case where there is a special figure game interruption flag), the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted or the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted Good.

On the other hand, when executing the processing of step A1023 after executing steps A1016, A1017, A1018, and A1020, the game control device 100 sets the RAM access prohibition area to access permission (A1023). Further, all RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1024), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (A1025).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1026). The area to be initialized is the customer waiting demonstration area and the area related to the setting of the effect mode. Further, the game control device 100 transmits a command for RAM initialization to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1027), and executes the process of step A1028. The commands at the time of RAM initialization include a model designation command, a decoration special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command, and the like. In response to the RAM initialization command, the performance control device 300 displays a customer waiting demo on the screen of the display device 41, and notifies the RAM initialization by the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 and the upper speakers 19a and 19b. Perform (for example, 30 seconds).

In addition, the command for power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1022 and the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1027 further include an effect mode information command indicating a state of an effect mode and a time saving state depending on the model. Includes a time saving information command indicating the number of games remaining in.

The game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1028). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After executing the CTC activation process in step A1028, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1029). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposed pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

The bit transposition pattern is the method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before the bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be allowed to arbitrarily set it.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the jackpot symbols (jackpot symbols) Random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2)) is saved in a predetermined area of RWM as an initial value (start value) (A1030), and interruption is permitted (A1031). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number updating process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1032). In addition, although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are the timer interrupt process which is the processing unit of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) having the same cycle.

Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value changing method" is adopted in which the start value is changed every time the random number makes a round by using each initial value random number (generated by software). Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method by +1 or 1, or may be a random update by which all values within the range appear in a scattered manner without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process of step A1032, the game control device 100 sets the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus (A1033), and the power failure monitoring is performed. It is determined whether the signal is on (A1034). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1034 is “N”), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process of step A1032. That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (A1031) before the initial value random number updating process (A1032), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is initialized. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being stressed by making the value random number update processing wait.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process of step A1032 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process also in the timer interrupt process. When such a method is adopted, both of the initial value random number updating processes are performed. In order to prevent the update process from being executed, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number updating process. No, there is an advantage that the main process is simplified thereby.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (result of A1034 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1033. The determination is made (A1035). When the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (the result of A1035 is “N”), the process returns to step A1034 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks continues (result of A1035 is “Y”), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, interrupt once Is prohibited (A1036), and OFF data is output to all output ports (A1037).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1038) and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1039). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is cut off is executed (A1040), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1041). Finally, the process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1042), and the process stands by until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power shutdown was correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), and the main control means delays the start of the main control means when the power is turned on, and sets a predetermined waiting time for waiting the start of the slave control device (game control device 100), and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.

In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111c capable of storing data, the initialization operation section (initialization switch) operable from the outside, and the initialization operation section being operated. It is provided with an initialization unit (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111c, and the operation state of the initialization unit is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111c after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the checksum calculation process. The checksum calculation processing is executed in steps A1019 and A1040 of the main processing shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B.

The game control device 100 first sets the start address of the RWM as the start value of the calculated address (A1101). Then, the number of repetitions is set (A1102), and "0" is set as the calculated value (A1103). The number of bytes of the RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address as a new calculated value (A1104), updates the calculated address by +1 (A1105), and updates the number of repetitions by -1 (A1106). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation is completed (A1107).

When the checksum calculation is not completed (result of A1107 is “N”), the game control device 100 repeats the processing from step A1104 to step A1107. When the checksum calculation is completed (the result of A1107 is “Y”), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the initial value random number updating process. The initial value random number updating process is executed in step A1032 of the main process shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B.

The game control device 100 updates the jackpot symbol initial value random number by +1 (A1201). Then, the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1202), and the initial value random number updating process is ended.

Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol, "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit symbol Is.

As described above, the randomness of the random numbers can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. When the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes input processing from various sensors and switches and capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Further, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (special winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) is executed (A1304). When the firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. ..

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 200 by various processes (A1305), and further, a random number update process 1 (A1306), a random number update. Processing 2 (A1307) is executed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower winning opening switch 38a, and the upper winning opening switch 39a, and the error monitoring A winning opening switch/state monitoring process for performing (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened) is executed (A1308).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning in the starting opening by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A1309). Then, the special figure 1 game process for performing the special figure 1 variable display game is executed (A1310), and the special figure 2 game process for performing the special figure 2 variable display game process is executed (A1311). Details of the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a segment LED edit process which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives the segment LEDs for displaying the special figure variation game and various information regarding the game so as to display desired contents. (A1312). The details of the segment LED editing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1313). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether there is any abnormality is executed (A1314). The details of the magnet fraud monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. Details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1315). Details of the external information editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. After that, the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that when the timer interrupt process returns, restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of the register bank specification is configured to be performed automatically. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are enabled after the external information editing process. It is also possible to perform the processing for returning or the processing for returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (A1303) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the input process.

The game control device 100 first reads the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 (A1401). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1402).

Next, the game control device 100 saves (stores) the read input port 1, that is, the state of the first input port 122 in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (A1403). Then, after preparing the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 (A1404), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (A1405). Subsequently, unused bit data is prepared (A1406), and further bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1407). Then, the switch reading process is executed (A1408). Here, in the present embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in RWM or another memory.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM (A1409), and prepares the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 (A1410). Furthermore, unused bit data is prepared (A1411), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1412). Further, thereafter, the switch reading process is executed (A1413), and the input process is ended.

[Switch reading process]
Next, details of the switch reading process (A1408, A1413) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switch reading process.

The game control device 100 first reads the state of the signal captured in the target input port (A1501). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1502), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1503), and the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is saved ( It is stored) (A1504). After that, it waits until the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading elapses (A1505).

When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, the game control device 100 performs the second reading of the state of the signal taken in the target input port (A1506). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1507), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1508), and the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is saved ( It is stored) (A1509). After that, a deterministic bit pattern in which the bit having the same state is 1 and the bit having a different state is 0 is created in the first and second readings (A1510), and the deterministic bit pattern and the port input state 2 are ANDed to determine this time. Bit (A1511).

Next, the game control device 100 creates an undetermined bit pattern in which the same state bit is 0 and the different bit is 1 in the first and second readings (A1512). The logical product of the determined state and the last-held bit is obtained (A1513). This makes it possible to obtain the state of the signal from which noise due to chattering of the switch is removed.

Then, the game control device 100 combines the currently confirmed bit and the previously held bit, and saves the currently confirmed state (A1514). Further, the exclusive OR of the last time and the confirmed state of this time is taken and saved as the rising edge (A1515). Then, the switch reading process ends.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reads the switch once for each interrupt processing and compares it with the previous read result to change the signal. There is a method of determining whether or not it has been done, but if it is done so, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost by the time of the next interrupt processing, it may not be possible to correctly determine. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output processing (A1304) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing.

The game control device 100 first outputs (resets) off data to the port 135 (see FIG. 7) that outputs the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 for outputting the data of the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b are combined and output (A1602).

Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). Then, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the digit output/external information output port 136 (A1606). After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135 (A1608).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and combines the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), further combines the combined data and the output data of the launch permission (A1610), and finally combines them. The data is output to the external information/launch permission signal output port 137 (A1611). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1612). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1613).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 which outputs the test signal to the test shooting test device, and the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The combined data is output to (A1614). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test-shooting test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1615). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1616), and the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmitting process (A1305) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout command transmission process.

The game control device 100 first checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (A1701). The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111c of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The number-of-wins counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 constitutes a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command.

The number-of-wins counter area 2 is for transmitting a main award ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of award balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning a prize is reached to a predetermined number (here, 10). In the area to be used, winning data corresponding to the prize balls for which the main prize ball signal generation processing has not been performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 constitutes a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main award ball signal, the payout award ball signal is also output to the external device every time the number of award balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). It is possible to monitor illegal payouts by comparing these two signals.

Each of these prize number counter areas is classified according to the number of prize balls set for each prize hole (for example, 2 prize balls, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 13 prize balls, 14 prize balls). ) Is provided with a winning number counter area, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The prize number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the prize number counter area 2 so that more prize data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, so that more untransmitted This is because data may be accumulated.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the prize number counter area 2 in step A1701, the game control device 100 selects the prize to be checked among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls. It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than "0" in the number counter area.

When there is no count number in the winning number counter area 2 (result of A1701 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked (A1702). Further, it is determined whether or not the check of the count numbers of all the prize number counter areas has been completed (A1703).

When all the checks are completed (result of A1703 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A1712. On the other hand, if all the checks are not completed (result of A1703 is “N”), the process returns to step A1701 and steps A1701 to A1703 are repeated.

If there is a count number (result of A1701 is “Y”), the game control device 100 subtracts (−1) the count number of the target prize number counter area (A1704), and the prize number counter area 2 The payout amount corresponding to the address is acquired (A1705). Then, the value in the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts are added (A1706), and the addition result is saved as a new remaining number of prize balls in the remaining number of prize balls area (A1707). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before the process of step A1707, a fraction which is less than a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, the game control device 100 subtracts 10 from the addition result (A1708), and determines whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (A1709). If it is not 0 or more (result of A1709 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, when it is 0 or more (result of A1709 is “Y”), the value of the main prize ball signal output count area is updated by +1 (A1710), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining count area (A1711). Then, the process returns to step A1708.

Through the above processing, the main prize ball signal comes to be output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information about the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of the game balls to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. .. By outputting the main award ball signal, when the payout of the game balls is concentrated during a big hit, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game balls, so It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of special prize balls cannot be counted.

If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (A1712), and determines whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (A1713). When the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (result of A1713 is “N”), the payout command transmission process is ended. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (result of A1713 is “Y”), it is determined whether the payout busy signal status (flag) is busy (busy status flag) (A1714).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control, and when the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is in an on state (busy state). It is said that That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal serves as a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control. The payout busy signal status (flag) is information that sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal, and is an idle that can immediately start the payout control. Either a state, a busy state in which payout control cannot be started immediately, or an indefinite state in which the state is indefinite is set.

When the payout busy signal status is busy (the result of A1714 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 ends the payout command transmission process. The case of not being in the busy state includes the case of being in the idle state and the case of being in an indefinite state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform unnecessary processing by not performing the subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. We are trying to prevent this and reduce the burden of control.

The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal status area in the process when the power is turned on. This indefinite state is set to the idle state or the busy state based on that the state of the payout busy signal is maintained for a predetermined period to a state indicating that the payout control can be immediately started or impossible. To resolve. In other words, when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, even if the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period without being transmitted. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the award ball command and surely recognizes that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the award ball command, thereby performing the payout control corresponding to the award ball command. You can prevent it from being lost.

When the payout busy signal status is not busy (the result of A1714 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (A1715). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the prize number counter area 1, among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls, the count number which is not “0” is displayed in the prize number counter area to be checked. Determine whether there is.

Then, when there is no count number (result of A1715 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the prize number counter area 1 to be checked (A1716), and all the prize number counter areas are checked. It is determined whether the check of the count number is completed (A1717). When all the checks are completed (result of A1717 is “Y”), the payout command transmitting process is ended. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (result of A1717 is “N”), the process returns to step A1715, and steps A1715 to A1717 are repeated.

Further, when there is a count number (result of A1715 is “Y”), the game control device 100 subtracts (−1) the count number of the target prize number counter area (A1718), and the target prize number counter. The payout command corresponding to the area is acquired (A1719). Then, the payout command (payout number command) is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (A1720), the initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (A1721), and then the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms is set as an initial value, for example.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the gaming control device 100 outputs a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control, which indicates that the payout control can be started. In the case shown, it constitutes prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

In this way, the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. A ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not yet been paid out will be held in the game control device 100 side, so that it will be backed up in the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs and backed up in the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without the function for performing.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, in the conventional gaming machine, a function for backing up is required, which causes a problem of cost increase. According to this embodiment, it is possible to realize accurate payout control without providing the payout control device 200 with a function for backing up.

Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, it is possible to output the main prize ball signal without delay, and the external device such as the hall computer does not pay the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, and for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since a prize ball command counter capable of storing information about the prize ball command and a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information about the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

From the above, while performing the game control comprehensively, the winning area (the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the general winning opening 35, the first special variable winning device 38 provided in the gaming area 32. , The second special variation winning device 39) based on the winning of the game ball based on the winning of the game ball, the game control means (game control device 100), and the game based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. The payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of the balls is provided, and the game control means is a state signal output from the payout control means and indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control. The state signal indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control when the award ball command is controlled to be sent to the payout control means based on the (busy signal) and a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure. Even if is output, the prize signal is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the state signal indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control is continuously output for a predetermined period. Accordingly, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, in the game area 32, winning areas having different numbers of prize balls (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variation winning device 38, second special variation winning device 39) are provided. The plurality of game control means (game control device 100) can specify, for each number of prize balls, whether or not a prize ball command for instructing the payout control of the game balls has not been transmitted (game control device 100). And the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and when each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The payout control means sends the status signal to determine whether or not the payout control means can start payout control, before specifying whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command. I am going to do it.

In addition, the game control is performed comprehensively, and a predetermined prize area (first start prize hole 36, second start prize hole 37, general prize hole 35, first special variable prize device 38, second special variable prize device 39). ) A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball, and a payout control for performing a game ball payout control based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. With the means (payout control device 200), the game control means can start the payout control by a status signal output from the payout control means, which indicates whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control. When it indicates that the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means, and the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the game ball in a predetermined winning area. External information output means (game control device 100) for outputting a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information about the outside of the gaming machine, and the external information output means is output from the payout control means. The signal outputs the prize ball signal regardless of whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control.

In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives the prize ball command even if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started in the event of a power failure and recovery from the power failure. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200) and the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started in response to the award ball command corresponding to the state continuing for a predetermined period. This means that the information is sent to the payout control means.

In addition, the game control means (game control device 100), the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information on the prize ball command, and the prize capable of storing information on the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). The ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) has a predetermined winning area (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35). , The first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39) generate a prize ball command in units of one winning, and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The prize ball command counter (game control device 100) is configured to transmit the prize ball command to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize information is given in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area. It is possible to store a prize ball command that has not been transmitted by updating when a game ball is won in a predetermined prize area and updating it in response to transmission to a prize ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball into a predetermined prize area, and outputs a prize ball signal each time the cumulative value reaches a predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter is configured to output to the outside of the gaming machine, and the prize ball signal counter can store the information of the prize in units of one prize in the predetermined prize area, and the prize of the game ball in the predetermined prize area. It is possible to store the number of prize balls that has not been subjected to the accumulation process by updating the data at the same time as the accumulating process of the prize balls by the external information output means.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number update process 1. The random number update process 1 is executed in step A1306 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start value) of the big hit symbol random numbers and the small hit symbol random numbers that are the targets of the initial value random number update process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1801).

When the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (result of A1801 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A1804 and subsequent steps. On the other hand, when the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (result of A1801 is “Y”), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (A1802). Then, the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1803).

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1804). When the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1804 is “N”), the random number updating process 1 is ended.

On the other hand, when the small hitting symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (result of A1804 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the small hitting symbol initial value random number as the next initial value (A1805). Then, the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1806), and the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number update process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step A1307 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 1) as the fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the random number updating process 2 updates both. The update target is switched and processed every time an interrupt occurs. Further, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the upper byte and the lower byte are updated at different interrupt times. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determination random number) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. Is configured to.

The game control device 100 first updates a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which random number among a plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the subject of this update processing (A1901). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (A1902). Then, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (A1903). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has completed one round.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads the value of the M1 counter in which a random value is set (A1904).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter, and masks the value of the M1 counter (A1905). Note that the mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1. Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, and the lower 1 bits of the M1 counter are updated when updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (A1906). Then, when the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (result of A1906 is “Y”), the value left by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as the additional value ( Hereinafter, this is referred to as "masked value") is set to a mask update value obtained by adding "1", the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (A1907), and the process proceeds to step A1909.

Further, when the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (result of A1906 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the upper 1 byte to “0” as the additional value and the lower 1 byte. The mask update value is set (A1908), and the process proceeds to step A1909. The reason why "1" is added to the masked value is that the masked value may become "0" and the value does not change by adding "0".

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (A1909). If it is a 2-byte random number (result of A1909 is “Y”), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (A1910), and the process proceeds to step A1912. On the other hand, if the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (result of A1909 is “N”), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value and the lower 1 byte of the random number value is set to the random number area of the update. A value (1 byte) is set (A1911), and the process proceeds to step A1912.

The game control device 100 sets a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in the processing of step A1907 or A1908 to the new random number value, and whether the new random number value is larger than the upper limit judgment value acquired in the processing of A1903. It is determined whether or not (A1913).

Then, when the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (result of A1913 is “N”), the game control device 100 places the new random number value in the lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number. Save (A1915). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (result of A1913 is “Y”), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is set as a new new random number value (A1914), The random number value is saved in the lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (A1915).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (A1916). If it is not a 2-byte random number (result of A1916 is “N”), the random number updating process 2 is ended. On the other hand, if it is a 2-byte random number (result of A1916 is “Y”), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in the higher random number area of the 2-byte random number. Then (A1917), the random number updating process 2 is ended.

In this way, the CPU 111a updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of special figure 1 and special figure 2. Therefore, the CPU 111a, among the various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting area of the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game. It constitutes a random number updating means for updating the variation pattern random number for determining

[Winning prize switch/Status monitoring processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a winning opening switch/state monitoring process. The winning opening switch/state monitoring process is executed in step A1308 in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

First, the game control device 100 prepares the fraud monitoring table 1 corresponding to the upper special winning opening switches 39a (two pieces) in the upper special winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) (A2001). Then, despite the fact that the special winning opening is not open, whether or not there is an illegal winning in the special winning opening is monitored, and fraud & prize monitoring processing for detecting a normal winning is executed (A2002). Details of the fraud & winning award monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the fraud monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of the data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of the fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, the fraudulent winning error notification command, the fraudulent The information on the winning number upper limit value (the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations), the winning port monitoring table, and the notification timer update information (permission/update) is defined. Further, in the winning prize port monitoring table, information on the number of repetitions of monitoring (the number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the address of the winning number counter region 1 and the address of the winning number counter region 2 is defined. The fraud monitoring table and the winning hole monitoring table are prepared for each switch to be monitored.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the fraud monitoring table 2 corresponding to the lower special winning opening switch 38a in the lower special winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) (A2003). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process of monitoring the fraudulent prize and detecting the normal prize is executed (A2004).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of winning opening switches (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that can always win the prize (A2005). ), the winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number is executed (A2006).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 abnormality variation monitoring process (A2007). In the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation number) is counted as the abnormal fluctuation number in the normal game state (at the time of low probability), and the abnormal fluctuation number is a prescribed value ( For example, when 5) is reached, the effect control device 300 is caused to perform error notification. Details of the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals whose state should be monitored is to be monitored this time (A2008). ). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2009). Then, the gaming machine status check processing for determining a status such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2010). The details of the gaming machine state check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output by the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) 1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (shooting ball out error) based on the shot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, the status based on the payout abnormal status signal (payout abnormal error) Monitoring is set.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2011). Then, a gaming machine status check process for determining a status such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2012).

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status (glass frame opening error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch. Is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (body frame opening error, front frame opening error) based on the signal output from the front frame opening detection switch is set. Further, when the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the frame radio wave incorrect signal (frame radio wave incorrect) is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the status scan counter is 0 (A2013). When the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (result of A2013 is "N"), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is ended. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

Further, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (result of A2013 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (A2014), and whether an error has occurred, etc. The gaming machine state check process for determining the state of A is executed (A2015).

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is 1 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process of setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2016). ), and ends the winning opening switch/state monitoring process. The details of the payout busy signal check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Note that the processing from steps A2014 to A2016 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, and therefore is executed once for every four timer interrupts. .. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing from A2014 to A2016 is performed every 16 ms.

[Illegal & prize monitoring processing]
FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the procedure of fraud & prize monitoring processing. The fraud & winning prize monitoring process is executed in steps A2002 and A2004 in the winning port switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.

The fraud & winning prize monitoring process is a process performed for the lower special winning opening switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39. Regarding the special winning opening (special variation winning devices 38, 39), it is easy to perform fraudulently opening the opening/closing member to insert the game ball and pay out the prize ball. ..

The game control device 100 first checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch of the error monitoring target (A2101), and determines whether or not it is in the fraud monitoring period (A2102). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special game state in which the first special variable winning a prize device 38 is opened when the winning prize switch of the error monitoring target is the lower special winning prize switch 38a. Alternatively, it is a period other than during the special game state in which the second special variable winning a prize device 39 is opened when the winning port switch to be error monitored is the upper special winning port switch 39a.

Then, in the fraud monitoring period (result of A2102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (A2103). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2103 is “N”), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (the result of A2103 is “Y”), the number of illegal winnings of the target is updated by +1 (A2104), and it is determined whether the number of illegal winnings after addition is illegal to be monitored. It is determined whether or not the number is 5 or more (for example, 5) (A2105).

The reason why the number of judgments is 5 is, for example, when the big winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the big winning hole, and the game ball has passed the valid period of the count switch. This is because it is not judged to be fraudulent when a player wins a prize or when there is noise in a signal, and so as not to be easily judged to be an error even if it is not fraudulent.

And when it is not more than the determined number (the result of A2105 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (A2110). If the number is equal to or more than the determined number (the result of A2105 is “Y”), the number of fraudulent prizes is limited to the fraud occurrence determination number (A2106), and the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent prize notification timer area. (A2107).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a target fraud generating command (A2108), and further prepares a fraud prize generating flag as a fraud flag (A2109). Then, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

On the other hand, when it is not during the fraud monitoring period (result of A2102 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of a target winning opening switch (A2110) and sets prize balls. The counter updating process is executed (A2111). Details of the winning number counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, the game control device 100 loads the target notification timer update information (A2112) and determines whether or not there is permission to update the notification timer (A2113). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (result of A2113 is “N”), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. On the other hand, if updating of the notification timer is permitted (result of A2113 is “Y”), -1 is updated if the target notification timer is not 0 (A2114). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning port switch of the error monitoring target is one upper special winning port switch 39a, and is permitted when the winning port switch of the error monitoring target is the other upper special winning port switch 39a. Not done. This prevents the notification timer from being updated twice as often with regard to the injustice notification of the second special variation winning device 39, and prevents the time from being half the prescribed time (for example, 60000 ms). .. In addition, when the winning prize switch of the error monitoring target is the lower special winning prize switch 38a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (A2115), and when the value is not 0 (result of A2115 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up. Ends the fraud & winning award monitoring process. Further, when the value of the notification timer is 0 (the result of A2115 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the target fraud cancellation command is prepared (A2116) and the fraud flag is set. The illegal prize release flag is prepared as (A2117). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2118).

When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is “Y”), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in this fraud & prize monitoring process. Clears the target number of illegal prizes (A2119).

In addition, the game control device 100, after the process of step A2119 is completed, or when the value of the notification timer is not 0 (the result of A2118 is “N”), that is, the previous fraud & prize monitoring process. When the value of the notification timer has become 0 in step 1, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

When the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (result of A2120 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 ends the fraud & winning award monitoring process. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (result of A2120 is "N"), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (A2121), and the command setting process is executed. Is executed (A2122). After that, the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process ends.

By the above processing, the fraud occurrence command is transmitted to the performance control device 300 when the fraud occurs, and the fraud cancellation command is transmitted to the performance control device 300 when the fraud is released, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set. The Rukoto.

[Winning prize counter update process]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning number counter updating process. The prize number counter updating process is executed in step A2111 of the fraud & prize monitoring process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first obtains the number of winning opening switches to be monitored from the winning opening monitoring table (A2201), and determines whether or not there is an input (to be exact, a change in the input) in the target winning opening switch. (A2202). If there is no input (result of A2202 is “N”), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (A2212).

On the other hand, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2202 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 1 (A2203), and loads the loaded value. +1 is updated (A2204). Further, it is determined whether or not an overflow occurs according to the updated value (A2205).

When the overflow has not occurred (result of A2205 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (A2206). After the processing of step A2206 ends, or when an overflow occurs (result of A2205 is “Y”), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (A2207).

After that, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2208), and determines whether or not an overflow occurs according to the updated value (A2209). If no overflow occurs (result of A2209 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (A2210). After the processing of step A2206 ends or when an overflow occurs (result of A2209 is “Y”), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211). Then, it is determined whether or not monitoring of all the switches is completed (A2212).

When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (result of A2212 is “N”), the game control device 100 returns to the process of step A2202 for determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (the result of A2212 is “Y”), the winning number counter updating process is completed. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Production command setting process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect command setting process for setting the effect command to be transmitted to effect control device 300. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first reads the status of the production serial transmission buffer (A2301). Further, it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (A2302).

Further, when the transmission buffer is not full (result of A2302 is “N”), the game control device 100 writes the command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A2303).

When the transmission buffer is full (result of A2302 is “Y”), the game control device 100 returns to the process of step A2301.

Further, the game control device 100 reads the status of the production serial transmission buffer (A2304) and determines whether the transmission buffer is full (A2305). If the transmission buffer is full (result of A2305 is "Y"), the process returns to step A2304.

Further, when the transmission buffer is not full (result of A2305 is “N”), the game control device 100 writes command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A2306), and then sets production command. The process ends.

As described above, by transmitting the effect command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the load on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the effect command can be analyzed with difficulty. In addition, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300 as well, it is not necessary to take in the command in the strobe, and the load can be reduced.

[Special figure 2 Abnormal variation monitoring processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process. The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing is executed in step A2007 in the winning a prize switch/state monitoring processing shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (A2401). Note that, as will be described later, the special figure 1 variation check flag is set each time the special figure 1 variation display game is started with a low probability of winning (including the normal gaming state). If the Toku-zu 1 fluctuation check flag is not set (result of A2401 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2407.

When the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (the result of A2401 is "Y"), the game control device 100 clears the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (A2402), and updates the special figure 1 fluctuation number by +1 ( Only 1 is added) (A2403). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations in special figure 1 is smaller than a prescribed value (for example, 18) (A2404). When the number of fluctuations in special figure 1 is smaller than the specified value (result of A2404 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2407.

When the special figure 1 fluctuation number is equal to or more than the specified value (the result of A2404 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 updates −1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is not 0 (A2405). , Toku-zu 1 The number of fluctuations is cleared to 0 (A2406).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (A2407). If the Toku-zu 2 fluctuation check flag is not set (result of A2407 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2410. As will be described later, the special figure 2 variation check flag is set each time the special figure 2 variation display game is started with a low probability of winning (including the normal gaming state).

When the special figure 2 variation check flag is set (the result of A2407 is "Y"), the game control device 100 clears the special figure 2 variation check flag (A2408) and updates the special figure 2 abnormal variation number by +1. (A2409). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is smaller than a prescribed value (for example, 5) (A2410).

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is equal to or more than the prescribed value (the result of A2410 is “N”), the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the prescribed value used for the determination of step A2410. (A2411). Next, an initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is set to the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer as an error notification timer (A2412), and a special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence flag indicating occurrence of special figure 2 abnormal change is prepared ( (A2413), a special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence command is prepared as an effect command (A2414), and the process proceeds to step A2419.

When the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is smaller than the specified value (the result of A2410 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer by -1 (A2415). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 abnormality change notification timer has timed up (A2416). If the time has not expired (result of A2416 is “N”), the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process is ended.

When the time is up (the result of A2416 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation flag (A2417), and prepares a special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command as an effect command (A2418). .. Next, it is determined whether the prepared flag is the same as the current value in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (A2419). When the prepared flag is the same as the current value in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (the result of A2419 is "Y"), the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process is ended.

When the prepared flag is different from the current value of the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (the result of A2419 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal change release flag. Is determined (A2420). If the prepared flag is not the release flag (result of A2420 is “N”), the process moves to step A2422.

When the prepared flag is the release flag (result of A2420 is “Y”), the game control device 100 clears the special figure 2 abnormal variation number to 0 (A2421). That is, when the special figure 2 abnormal variation release flag is set in the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area (A2417), the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is cleared to 0. To do. After that, the prepared flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area in the RWM (A2422). That is, when the prepared flag is different from the current flag of the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area, the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area is rewritten with the prepared flag. Next, the effect command setting process for setting the effect command is executed (A2423), and the special figure 2 abnormality variation monitoring process is ended.

When a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag indicating the occurrence of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation (abnormal execution state of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area, an external information editing process described later is performed. The security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer). When the effect control device 300 receives the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence command as the effect command, the effect control device 300 causes the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b to notify the error.

In the normal game state (the probability of a big hit being low), the player usually hits the left with a first start winning opening 36, but the second starting winning opening 37 rather than the first starting winning opening 36. When the player wins more to the player (when the probability of a small hit is high), the player may aim at the second start winning hole 37 by right-handing. In this case, the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed by the winning in the second starting winning opening 37, and an error is notified to the player to stop right-handed hitting. In the normal game state, when left-handed play is performed, processing is performed according to a normal route such as the dotted line in FIG. 23, and the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence command (that is, error notification) does not occur. Figure 2 The abnormal change notification timer also does not start.

The special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring processing will be further described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 24A to 24C. 24A to 24C exemplify the results of the above-mentioned Toku-zu 2 abnormal change monitoring processing.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed a plurality of times in the normal game state (the probability of hit is low), and when the special figure 2 abnormal variation number reaches a prescribed value (here, 5) (A2410). Result is "N"), the initial value (60 seconds) of the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer and special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence command can be set (A2412, A2414), and the effect of receiving the special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence command The control device 300 can start notification of an error using the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b.

After that, since the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is subtracted by 1 from the specified value (here, 5) (A2411), unless the special figure 2 variation check flag is set again, from the next special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process. Toku-zu 2 The abnormal change notification timer is continuously updated by -1 to measure the time (the result of A2410 is "Y"). The effect control device 300 can continue error notification until the special figure 2 abnormal variation notification timer times out due to the passage of the period (60 seconds) corresponding to the initial value and the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is received. The prize balls are paid out even during the error notification.

During the error notification period (60 seconds), external information is output to the external information terminal 71, an error occurrence can be notified to an external device such as a hall computer, and when performing a test shooting test, the test shooting test device is played. Machine error status signal can be output (external information editing process described later).

In addition, when the number of abnormal fluctuations of the special figure 2 reaches the specified value (5 in this case) again while the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer is timing (error is being notified), the initial value of the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer is reset again. After being set, error notification for 60 seconds can be started (timer reset). When a big hit occurs (start), a special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is transmitted, and the special figure 2 abnormal variation number, the special figure 2 abnormal variation notification timer, and the special figure 1 variation number are cleared to 0 (the special figure display described later). Medium processing, fanfare/interval intermediate processing transition setting processing).

Further, in FIG. 23, the variation check flag is set when the special figure variation display game starts in the low probability state, but the variation check flag has a winning in the starting winning opening in the low probability state. The control may be performed as set in some cases. In this case, as shown in FIG. 24B, control is performed using the number of winnings instead of the number of fluctuations, and in the normal game state, there are a plurality of winnings (special figure 2 winnings) to the second start winning port 37, FIG. 2 When the number of abnormal prizes reaches a specified value (here, 5), error notification can be started.

In the control of FIG. 23, as shown in FIG. 24A, after the error notification by the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancel command is finished, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is set to 0 (A2421), but as shown in FIG. FIG. 2 The number of abnormal fluctuations (the number of abnormal prizes) may be maintained at a prescribed value.

In FIG. 24C, when the Toku-zu 1 variation number reaches a specified value (18 in this case) (the result of A2404 is “N”), the Toku-zu 2 abnormal variation number is updated by −1 to decrease from 4 to 3, for example. (A2405), the situation where the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0 and changes from 18 to 0 is shown (A2406). As described above, in the normal game state (the probability of hit is low), even if the special figure 2 variation display game is executed a plurality of times by right-handing and the special figure 2 abnormal variation number increases, the player makes left-handing. When the number of fluctuations in Toku-zu 1 reaches the specified value after returning (stopping right-handed driving), the number of abnormal fluctuations in Toku-zu 2 decreases and the error notification can be avoided.

[Game machine status check process]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine status check processing. The gaming machine status check processing is executed in steps A2010, A2012 and A2015 in the winning opening switch/status monitoring processing shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2501). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming state. The relationship between the status monitoring table and the status scan counter is as described in the winning port switch/status monitoring processing shown in FIG.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is on (A2502). When the signal to be checked is not ON (result of A2502 is “N”), that is, when the signal to be checked is OFF, a state OFF flag is prepared as a state flag (A2503) and the target state OFF command is acquired. And prepare (A2504). Further, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2505). The state-off flag indicates a normal state regarding an error-related signal, and indicates a non-touch state regarding a touch switch signal.

On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (result of A2502 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a state on flag as a state flag (A2506), acquires a target state on command, and prepares. Yes (A2507). Further, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2508). The state-on flag indicates an abnormal or incorrect state regarding an error system signal, and indicates a state with a touch regarding a touch switch signal.

When the process of step A2505 or step A2508 ends, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target signal control region matches the state of the acquired signal (A2509). If they do not match (result of A2509 is "N"), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2510), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2511).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2512). Further, it is determined whether the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or more than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2513). When the value of the updated state monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2513 is “N”), the gaming machine state check process is ended.

On the other hand, when the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or more than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2513 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by −1, and the timer comparison value − It remains at a value of 1 (A2514). Further, it is determined whether the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2515). If they match (the result of A2515 is “Y”), the gaming machine state check processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (result of A2515 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. Yes (A2516). Finally, effect command setting processing for setting effect commands is executed (A2517), and the gaming machine state check processing ends. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state on command is an error command, the effect control device 300 is caused to start error notification.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of payout busy signal check processing. The payout busy signal check process is executed in step A2016 in the winning port switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (A2601). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

When the payout busy signal is not on (the result of A2601 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares an idle state flag as a determination status (A2602) and sets an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec). Yes (A2603). On the other hand, when the payout busy signal is ON (result of A2601 is “Y”), a busy state flag is prepared as the determination status (A2604), and the ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) is set (A2605). ).

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value in the busy signal state region matches the current payout busy signal state (ON/OFF) (A2606). If they match (the result of A2606 is “Y”), the process moves to step A2609. If they do not match (the result of A2606 is "N"), the current payout busy signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (A2607), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (A2608).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by +1 (A2609), and determines whether the monitoring timer is equal to or more than the timer comparison value (A2610). When the monitoring timer is less than the timer comparison value (the result of A2610 is “N”), the payout busy signal check process is ended.

When the monitoring timer is equal to or more than the timer comparison value (the result of A2610 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by −1 and keeps the value smaller than the timer comparison value by 1 (A2611). The prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (busy signal status area) (A2612), and the payout busy signal check processing is ended.

The pay-out busy signal check process sets a pay-out busy signal flag (busy signal status) based on the pay-out busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, but the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues over the timer comparison value. It is hard to be affected by such as.

Further, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and becomes indefinite until any one of the signal states continues for the timer comparison value. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the power failure is restored, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the award ball command and surely recognizes that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the award ball command, thereby performing the payout control corresponding to the award ball command. You can prevent it from being lost.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A1309) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a starting opening 1 winning award monitoring table for monitoring a winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), and executes a hard random number acquisition process for acquiring a hard random number. (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start mouth prize to the first start prize hole 36 (A2703). Then, if there is no starting mouth winning (the result of A2703 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2709.

When there is a starting opening winning into the first starting winning opening 36 (result of A2703 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a low probability state (A2704). .. Then, in the case of the low probability state (including during the normal gaming state) (result of A2704 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2707.

When the probability of occurrence of a hit is not in the low probability state (when it is in the high probability state) (result of A2704 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a right-handing instruction notification command as a production command (A2705), and produces. Command setting processing is executed (A2706). As a result, the effect control device 300 can display the right-handing instruction display for instructing the right-handing on the display device 41 as a warning when the first starting winning opening 36 has a starting opening winning a prize. it can.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold for winning the first start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and executes special figure starting opening 1 switch processing (A2708). ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a starting opening 2 winning award monitoring table for monitoring the winning at the second starting winning opening (starting opening 2) 37 (A2709), and executes a hard random number acquisition process for acquiring a hard random number. Yes (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a winning opening winning combination in the second starting winning opening 37 (A2711). If there is no start opening prize (the result of A2711 is "N"), the start opening switch monitoring process is ended.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is a high-probability state (that is, a probability variation state) when there is a starting-port winning in the second starting winning port 37 (the result of A2711 is “Y”). A determination is made (A2712). When it is not in the high-probability state (in the low-probability state) (result of A2712 is “N”), it is determined whether or not it is in the big hit state (A2713). When it is not in the big hit state (the result of A2713 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the high-probability final variation is in progress (A2714). Whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress can be determined based on the high-probability final fluctuation flag set in the high-probability fluctuation number update processing described later.

Here, the high-probability final fluctuation (high-probability final fluctuation) is a final special-character fluctuation display game when the special-character fluctuation display game starts in a high-probability state, and is, for example, ST (special time). This is the final special figure fluctuation display game in the case where the high probability state is maintained for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) of fluctuation starts after the big hit ends in the machine.

If the high-probability final fluctuation is not occurring (result of A2714 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a left-handing instruction notification command as an effect command (A2715), and executes effect command setting processing (A2716). As a result, the effect control device 300 displays the left-handing instruction display for instructing left-handing on the display device 41 as a warning when there is a starting mouth winning in the second starting winning opening 37 during the normal gaming state. You can

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by winning in the second starting winning opening 37 (starting opening 2) (A2717), and executes special figure starting opening 2 switch processing (A2718). ), the start port switch monitoring process ends. The game control device 100 is in the high-probability state (result of A2712 is “Y”), in the big hit state (result of A2713 is “Y”), in the high-probability final fluctuation (result of A2714). Is “Y”), the left hitting instruction notification command is not prepared, and the processes of steps A2717 and A2718 are executed.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (A2702, A2710) in the above-mentioned starting port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hard random number acquisition process.

The game control device 100 first sets the information regarding the absence of a starting opening prize indicating that there is no starting opening winning combination (A2801). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (A2802), and when there is no input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition process ends. The target switch is the starting port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2702, and the starting port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2710.

When there is an input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 reads the random number latch register status (the state of the random number latch register) and determines whether the target random number latch register has latch data. It is determined (A2803, A2804). If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (result of A2804 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition process ends.

When there is latch data in the target random number latch register (result of A2804 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the jackpot random number extracted to the target hard random number latch register (A2805) and starts The starting mouth winning information indicating that there is a winning is set (A2806). The prepared jackpot random numbers are used in the special figure starting port 1 switch process and the special figure starting port 2 switch process.

[Special figure start opening 1 switch processing]
Next, details of the special figure starting port 1 switch process (A2708) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port 1 switch process.

The game control device 100 first loads the number of times the starting port 1 signal is output, which is the number of times information regarding the number of winnings to the starting port 1 switch 36a is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 (A2901). Further, the loaded value of the output number of the starting port 1 signal is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (A2903).

When the output count does not overflow (result of A2903 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the start mouth 1 signal output count area of the RWM (A2904). On the other hand, when the output count overflows (result of A2903 is “Y”), the process of step A2905 is executed without executing the process of step A2904.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure suspension (starting storage) to be updated corresponding to the starting opening 1 switch 36a is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure starting port 1 switch processing ends.

When the special figure reservation number is less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A2906) and updates the special figure 1 reservation number by +1. (A2907). The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including distribution of prefetch variation patterns).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number (A2908), and saves the jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (A2909). ). Subsequently, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A2910), and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911). Furthermore, a small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2912). Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage areas (variation pattern random number 1 storage area, variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) corresponding to the RWM ( A2913).

Next, the game control device 100 executes special figure reservation information determination processing (prefetch processing, predetermination processing) for determining special figure reservation information (A2914), and the decoration special figure 1 reservation number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number. A command is prepared as an effect command (A2915), effect command setting processing is executed (A2916), and the special figure starting port 1 switch processing ends. Details of the special figure reservation information determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Special figure starting port 2 switch processing]
Next, details of the special figure starting port 2 switch process (A2718) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port 2 switch process.

The starting port 2 signal output frequency, which is the number of times the information on the number of winnings to the starting port 2 switch 37a is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded (A3001). further,
The value of the output number of the starting port 2 signal loaded is updated by +1 (A3002), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (A3003).

When the output count does not overflow (result of A3003 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the start mouth 2 signal output count area of the RWM (A3004). On the other hand, when the output count overflows (result of A3003 is “Y”), the process of step A3005 is executed without executing the process of step A3004.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning to the second starting winning opening 37 is invalid, that is, whether the detection of the starting opening 2 switch 37a is invalid (A3005). In addition, during the big hit change/small hit change stop (during the special figure display process described later), during the big hit state (from the big hit change stop to the big hit end process described below), during the small hit state (from the small hit change stop If the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (changing) until the small hit end process described later), even if there is a game ball entering the second start winning opening 37, the second start is performed. It is treated as if there was no winning in the winning opening 37 and is invalidated. When the winning in the second starting winning opening 37 is invalid (the result of A3005 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the special figure starting opening 2 switch process.

On the other hand, when the winning in the second start winning port 37 is not invalid (result of A3005 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 holding number to 1 (A3006). Although the special figure 2 variable display game is started immediately after the special figure 2 start-up memory is generated, the special figure 2 hold number is set to 1 for the sake of control. Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 starting storage (A3007), and saves the jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (A3008). ..

Subsequently, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted (A3009), and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3010). Furthermore, a small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3011). Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area (variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) of the RWM (A3012), and the special figure starting port The two-switch process ends.

As described above, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started as soon as the special figure 2 start memory is generated, the special figure starting port 2 switch process is different from the special figure starting port 1 switch process. The special figure reservation information determination processing (prefetch processing, pre-determination processing) is not performed, and the decorative special figure 2 reservation number command is not prepared.

In this way, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game balls into the start winning area of the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, and extracts the predetermined random number, and the variable display game The starting prize storing means stores a predetermined number as a starting memory which is an execution right, with a predetermined upper limit. In addition, the starting winning prize storing means (game control device 100) has various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 36, and the first starting memory (up to a predetermined number (for example, 4)). Special figure 1 starting memory, special figure 1 starting winning memory), and various random number values extracted based on winning of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 37 are set to a predetermined number (here, 1) as the upper limit. It is stored as 2 starting memory (special figure 2 starting memory, special figure 2 starting winning memory).

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, details of the special figure reservation information determination process (A2914) in the special figure starting port 1 switch process described above will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure pending information determination processing (prefetch processing, predetermination processing). The special figure reservation information determination process is executed only for the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory) generated based on the winning of the game ball into the first start winning opening 36.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is a high probability state (that is, a probability variation state) (A3101). When it is not in the high probability state (the result of A3101 is “N”), it is determined whether or not it is in the big hit state (A3102). When it is not in the big hit state (the result of A3102 is "N"), the big hit determination process is executed based on the big hit random number value stored as the first starting memory (A3103).

If the high probability state (the result of A3101 is “Y”) or the big hit state (the result of A3102 is “Y”), the special figure hold information determination process does not perform the big hit determination process. The process ends as it is (preliminary determination (prefetching) is not performed).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3104). When the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3104 is “Y”), a big hit symbol random number check table is set (A3105), and big hit stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (A3106), and step A3111 Process shifts to.

When the determination result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (when the result is off) (the result of A3104 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs the small hit determination process based on the big hit random number value stored as the first starting memory. It is executed (A3107), and it is determined whether or not the determination result is a small hit (A3108). In this embodiment, a big hit random number is also used for the small hit determination.

If the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (the result of A3108 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the stop symbol information of the small hit (A3109), and if the determination result is not a small hit (A3108). The result is “N”), and the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (A3110).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the acquired or set stop symbol information as an effect command (A3111), and executes an effect command setting process (A3112). Then, the special figure 1 information setting process (A3113) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 1 for setting the variation mode of the special figure 1 variable display game. The variation pattern setting process (A3114) is executed. Next, the look-ahead variation pattern commands corresponding to the first half variation number and the second half variation number are prepared as effect commands (A3115), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3116).

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in the big hit state or the small hit state (A3201). Special figure 2 When it is neither in the big hit state or the small hit state of the variable display game (the result of A3201 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3202). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls are played by the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Monitor the detection.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (A3203). The special processing 1 game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. When the big hit state or the small hit state of the special display 2 variable display game is in effect (the result of A3201 is “Y”), the process of step A3202 is performed without performing the process of step A3202. Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3204). When the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3204 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3219.

When the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3204 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 assigns the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to in order to branch to the corresponding process is set in the register (A3205). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the special figure 1 game sequence branch table (A3206). Subsequently, a subroutine call with the special figure 1 game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number (A3207).

When the game process number is “0” in step A3207, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure 1 variable display game, sets the variation start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and sets the effect. Alternatively, the special figure 1 normal process for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 changing process is executed (A3208). The details of the special figure 1 normal process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is "1" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 displaying process. The special figure 1 change process is performed (A3209). The details of the processing during fluctuation of special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game processing number is “2” in step A3207, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 sets the fanfare command according to the kind of big hit, and The special figure 1 displaying process is executed to set the fanfare time according to the big winning opening pattern of the big hit and the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing (A3210). The details of the processing during the display of special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “3” in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the information necessary to set the opening time of the special winning opening, update the number of times of opening, and perform the processing during the opening of the special winning opening. A fanfare/interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A3211). Details of the fanfare/interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “4” in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if it is the final round, The process of opening the special winning opening is executed to set information necessary for performing the special winning opening remaining ball processing (A3212). Details of the special winning opening opening process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

When the game process number is “5” in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets a time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the final round, The special winning opening remaining ball process for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit ending process is executed (A3213). The details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “6” in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets information required for setting the special figure 2 game wait time value (described later) or executing the special figure 1 normal process. The special figure 1 big hit end processing which sets the setting etc. is executed (A3214). The details of the special figure 1 big hit ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67.

When the game process number is “7” in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, sets information necessary for performing the small hitting process, etc. The small hit fanfare processing is executed (A3215). Details of the small hit fanfare processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

When the game process number is "8" in step A3207, the game control device 100 performs a process for setting a small hit end command, a small hit setting for setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process, and the like. The hitting process is executed (A3216). The details of the small hit mid processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 70.

When the game process number is "9" in step A3207, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening and a special figure 1 small hit end process. A small hit remaining ball process is executed to set information necessary for execution (A3217). The details of the small hit remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “10” in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets information required for setting the special figure 2 game wait time value (described later) or executing the special figure 1 normal process. The special figure 1 small hitting end processing for setting etc. is executed (A3218). The details of the special figure 1 small hit end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

When the process based on the special figure 1 game process number is finished, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3219), and then displays the special figure 1 The symbol variation control process related to the container 51 is executed (A3220), and the special figure 1 game process is ended.

[Special Figure 2 game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 game process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 game process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in the big hit state or the small hit state (A3301). Special figure 2 When it is neither in the big hit state and the small hit state of the variable display game (the result of A3301 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls are played by the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Monitor the detection.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (A3303). The Toku-zu 2 game processing timer is clocked for the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. When the big hit state or the small hit state of the special display 2 variable display game is in effect (the result of A3301 is “Y”), the process of step A3303 is performed without performing the process of step A3302. Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3304). If the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3304 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3322.

When the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3304 is "Y"), that is, when the special control 2 game processing timer has timed out or has already timed up, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 game processing timer. It is determined whether the number of repetitions is 0 (A3305). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3305 is "N"), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (A3306). A long fluctuation timer value (for example, 60,000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the area (A3307). As will be described later, when the special figure 2 variable display game has a long variation and the variation time is a long time (for example, 10 minutes), the variation time timer cannot be set with 2 bytes, so steps A3303-A3307. The timer value for long fluctuation is counted by the number of times of repetition by the processing of 1. to prepare a timer with a long fluctuation time for the special figure 2 variable display game.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (result of A3304 is “Y”) and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (result of A3305 is “Y”). The special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (A3308). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3309). Subsequently, a subroutine call with the special figure 2 game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number (A3310).

When the game process number is “0” in step A3310, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and sets the variation start and effect of the special figure 2 variable display game. Alternatively, the special figure 2 normal processing for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 changing process is executed (A3311). The details of the special figure 2 normal process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is "1" in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 displaying process. The special figure 2 change process is executed (A3312). Details of the special figure 2 changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

When the game process number is “2” in step A3310, if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 sets the fanfare command according to the type of big hit, and The special figure 2 displaying process for setting the fanfare time according to the big winning opening pattern of the big hit and setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing is executed (A3313). Details of the special figure 2 displaying process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “3” in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets the information necessary for setting the opening time of the special winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, and performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening. The fanfare/interval processing for setting is executed (A3314). The fanfare/interval processing is common to that executed in the Toku-zu 1 game processing, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

When the game process number is “4” in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if it is the final round, The process of opening the special winning opening is executed to set the information necessary for performing the special winning opening remaining ball processing (A3315). The special winning opening opening process is common to the process executed in the special figure 1 game process, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

When the game process number is “5” in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets a time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the final round, The special winning opening remaining ball process for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit ending process is executed (A3316). The special winning opening remaining ball processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “6” in step A3310, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 jackpot end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process ( A3317). The details of the special figure 2 big hit ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

When the game process number is "7" in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and sets the information necessary for performing the small hitting process. The small hit fanfare processing is executed (A3318). The small hit fanfare middle processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

When the game process number is "8" in step A3310, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting a small hit end command and a small amount of information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process. The hitting process is executed (A3319). The small hitting process is common to the process executed in the special figure 1 game process, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 70.

When the game process number is "9" in step A3310, the game control device 100 executes a process of setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening and a special figure 2 small hit ending process. The small hit remaining ball process for setting the information necessary for the execution is executed (A3320). The small hit remaining ball process is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game process, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

When the game process number is “10” in step A3310, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 small hitting end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process. (A3321). The details of the special figure 2 small hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

When the process based on the special figure 2 game process number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A3322), and then displays the special figure 2 The symbol variation control process related to the container 52 is executed (A3323), and the special figure 2 game process is ended.

[Winning prize switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A3202, A3302) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the upper special winning opening (the second special variation winning device 39) is open (A3401), and if the upper special winning opening is not open (the result of A3401 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the remaining big ball of the upper special winning opening is being processed (A3402). If the remaining ball of the upper special winning opening is not being processed (the result of A3402 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the lower special winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) is open (A3403). In the case of the big hit state or the small hit state, the upper big winning opening and/or the lower big winning opening may be open.

When the lower special winning opening is open (the result of A3403 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (A3404), and the lower large winning opening switch is set. When there is an input (the result of A3404 is “Y”), the winning prize counter for counting the number of winnings to the special winning opening to be added in the present special winning opening switch monitoring processing is set to 1 (A3405). If the lower prize hole is not open (result of A3403 is “N”) or if there is no input to the lower prize switch (result of A3404 is “N”), the special prize switch monitoring process is ended. To do.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 is opening the upper special winning opening (result of A3401 is “Y”), or is performing the remaining ball processing of the upper special winning opening (result of A3402 is “Y”). ), and the winning counter is set to 0 (A3406). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch 1 of the upper special winning opening switches 39a (A3407), and when there is no input to the upper special winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3407 is "N"). ), and proceeds to the processing of step A3411.

When there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch 1 (result of A3407 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a special winning opening count command as an effect command for effecting a prize (A3408), The effect command setting process is executed (A3409), and the winning counter is incremented by 1 (A3410).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (A3411). If there is no input to the upper special winning opening switch 2 (result of A3411 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3415. When there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3411 is "Y"), a special winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command for effecting a prize (A3412), and effect command setting processing is executed. (A3413), and the winning counter is incremented by 1 (A3414).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning counter is 0 (A3415), and when the winning counter is not 0 (result of A3415 is "N"), the special winning opening remaining ball process is being performed. It is determined whether or not (A3416). When the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not being performed (the result of A3416 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (A3417). When the small hit remaining ball is not being processed (the result of A3417 is "N"), the value of the winning prize counter (here, 1 or 2) is added to the special winning opening count (A3418).

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if the winning counter is 0 (result of A3415 is “Y”), is in the big winning opening remaining ball processing (result of A3416 is “Y”), or small hit remaining When the ball processing is being performed (the result of A3417 is “Y”), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special winning opening count is equal to or more than an upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, 9) (A3419), and the special winning opening count is determined. Is less than the upper limit value (the result of A3419 is “N”), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. When the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (the result of A3419 is “Y”), the special winning opening count number is kept at the upper limit value (A3420), and the target special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (A3421). ).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot is being opened (A3422). If the jackpot is not being opened (the result of A3422 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is executed. finish. When the jackpot is being opened (the result of A3422 is “Y”), the jackpot opening operation end value is saved in the jackpot control pointer area (A3423), and then the jackpot switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the special winning opening will be closed and the first round will be completed.

[Special processing 1 usual processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal process (A3208) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal process of special figure 1.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game can start changing (A3501). Toku-zu 1 If the fluctuation display game cannot start fluctuation (if fluctuation cannot be started) (the result of A3501 is “N”), the Toku-zu 1 usual process number “0” is set in the Toku-zu 1 game process number area of the RWM. Save (A3502). Here, from the end of the big hit variation of the special figure 2 variable display game (during the process of displaying the special figure 2) to the end of the big hit operation (end processing of the special figure 2 big hit), and the small figure of the special figure 2 variable display game. From the end of the hit variation (during the process of displaying the special figure 2) to the end of the small hit operation (the special figure 2 small hit ending process), the special figure 1 variable display game cannot start changing.

When the special figure 1 variable display game can start changing (the result of A3501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the left-handing instruction has been informed (A3503). If the left-handing instruction notification command has already been prepared as an effect command and transmitted to the effect control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handing instruction notification has been made. If the left-handing instruction has been notified (result of A3503 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3507.

When the left-handing instruction notification has not been issued (result of A3503 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a left-handing instruction notification command as an effect command (A3504), executes effect command setting processing (A3505), and displays. A left-handing instruction notification flag indicating that a left-handing instruction is to be notified (displayed) by the device 41 or the like is set (A3506).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (A3507). When the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (result of A3507 is “Y”), the special figure 1 usual process number “0” is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area of the RWM (A3502). As a result, the special figure 1 normal processing is repeated until the number of special figure 1 reservations becomes 1 or more.

When the special figure 1 holding number is not 0 (the result of A3507 is “N”), the game control device 100 uses the variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) as a production command. It prepares (A3508) and executes effect command setting processing (A3509). Then, the special figure 1 variation start process for starting the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A3510). After that, a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared as an effect command (A3511), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3512).

Next, the game control device 100 sets information during fluctuation of special figure 1 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3513). Here, in the special figure status area, information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing or ((special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing) is set. Next, it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a high probability state (A3514), and if it is not in a high probability state (in a low probability state) (result of A3514 is “N”), during high probability final fluctuation. Or not (A3515). Whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress can be determined based on a high-probability final fluctuation flag described later.

When the high-probability final fluctuation is not in progress (the result of A3515 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (A3516), and executes the special figure 1 mid-fluctuation processing transition setting processing (A3517). ). The special figure 1 variation check flag is used in the above-mentioned special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring processing (FIG. 23).

On the other hand, if the gaming control device 100 is in the high probability state (result of A3514 is “Y”) or is in the high probability final fluctuation (result of A3515 is “Y”), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag Without setting, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is executed (A3517).

[Special figure 2 daily processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 normal process (A3311) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special process 2 ordinary process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing (A3601). If the special figure 2 variable display game cannot start fluctuating (if fluctuation start is not possible) (the result of A3601 is "N"), the special figure 2 normal process number "0" is placed in the special figure 2 game process number area of the RWM. Save (A3602). In addition, here, from the end of the big hit variation of the special figure 1 variable display game (during the process of displaying the special figure 1) to the end of the big hit operation (end processing of the special figure 1 big hit), and the small hit of the special figure 1 variable display game. From the end of the hit variation (during the process of displaying the special figure 1) to the end of the small hit operation (the special figure 1 small hit ending process), the special figure 2 variable display game cannot start changing.

When the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing (the result of A3601 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (A3602). Special figure 2 When the number of reservations is not 0 (the result of A3602 is "N"), the variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) is prepared as an effect command (A3603), Rendering command setting processing is executed (A3604). Then, the special figure 2 variation start process for starting the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3605).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during fluctuation of special figure 2 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3606). Here, in the special figure status area, information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing or (special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing) is set. Next, it is judged whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a high probability state (A3607), and if it is not in a high probability state (in a low probability state) (result of A3607 is "N"), during high probability final fluctuation. Or not (A3608). Whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress can be determined based on a high-probability final fluctuation flag described later.

When the high-probability final fluctuation is not in progress (the result of A3608 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (A3609) and executes the special figure 2 mid-fluctuation processing shift setting processing (A3610). ). The special figure 2 variation check flag is used in the above-mentioned special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring processing (FIG. 23).

On the other hand, if the gaming control device 100 is in the high probability state (result of A3614 is “Y”) or is in the high probability final fluctuation (result of A3615 is “Y”), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag Without setting, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is executed (A3617).

Game control device 100, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3602 is "Y"),
It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (A3611). When the number of special figure 1 reservations is 0 (the result of A3611 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (A3612). When the Toku-zu 1 is not changing (result of A3612 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3613). If the customer waiting demo has not started (result of A3613 is "N"), the customer waiting demo flag is set (A3614).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3615), and executes effect command setting processing (A3616). The production control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demo command can execute the customer waiting demo on the display device 41. After that, the special figure 2 normal processing number “0” is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3617). As a result, the special figure 2 normal process is repeated until the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 1.

On the other hand, if the special map 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3611 is “N”), the special figure 1 variable display game will be executed, and therefore the RWM special command will not be prepared without preparing a customer waiting demo command. The special figure 2 usual processing number "0" is saved in the FIG. 2 game processing number area (A3617). Also, when the special figure 1 is changing (result of A3612 is “Y”), or when the customer waiting demo has started (result of A3613 is “Y”), the customer waiting demo command is prepared. Instead, the special figure 2 normal process number "0" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area of the RWM (A3617).

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (A3510) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation start process.

The game control device 100 first sets a special figure 1 information setting flag (A3701). The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including distribution of prefetch variation patterns). Subsequently, the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is a big hit flag 1 setting process (A3702) for setting deviation information and big hit information, and a special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information ) Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3703), special figure 1 variable display game special figure 1 information setting process (A3704) that sets special figure information that is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the game is executed To do.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various kinds of information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3705). ). Next, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3706) for setting a fluctuation pattern that is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variable display game, and a fluctuation start information setting process (A3706) for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 variable display game ( A3707) is executed.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is a high probability state (that is, a probability variation state) (A3708). If it is not in the high-probability state (result of A3708 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (A3709). When the high-probability final fluctuation is not in progress (result of A3709 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) (A3710).

When the special figure 2 is changing (result of A3710 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3711). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3711 is “Y”), that is, the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is within the range of the time value of the special figure 2 game processing timer. If it is, the process proceeds to step A3714.

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3711 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more as a predetermined number. Is determined (A3712). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is less than the predetermined number (here, 4) (result of A3712 is "N"), the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is calculated (A3713). The remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is calculated by a value of (value of special figure 2 game processing timer area+repetition count×60000 msec).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be started is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (A3714). When the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be started is equal to or longer than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A3714 is “N”), the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is more specific. A command for notifying that it is longer than the remaining fluctuation time of the variable display game shown in FIG. 2 is prepared as an effect command (A3715), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3716). If the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is equal to or longer than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit, etc., the decoration 41 The production related to the game may end suddenly. For this reason, the effect control device 300 that has received the above command sets (changes) the effect related to the decorative special figure 1 variable display game to, for example, something that is not flashy so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a high-probability fluctuation number update process for updating and managing the number of fluctuations (remaining number) of the special figure fluctuation display game started in the high probability state (A3717), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. To finish.

On the other hand, in the high probability state (result of A3708 is “Y”), in the high probability final fluctuation (result of A3709 is “Y”), when the special figure 2 is not changing (result of A3710 is “ (N)), the processes of steps A3711 to A3716 are not performed, and the process proceeds to step A3717.

Further, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (4 here) (the result of A3712 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shows the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game. Since (240 (=4×60) seconds or more in this case) is longer than the longest variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game, a command notifying that the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is longer Without preparing, shifts to the processing of step A3717.

Furthermore, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (result of A3714 is “Y”), the game control device 100 also changes the special figure 1 variable display game. The process shifts to step A3717 without preparing a command for notifying that the variation time of is longer.

[Special map 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (A3605) in the special figure 2 normal process will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation start process.

The game control device 100 first sets a special figure 2 information setting flag (A3801). The special figure 2 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including distribution of prefetch variation patterns). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process (A3802) for setting deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information ) Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3803), special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) that sets special figure information that is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game To do.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A3805). ). Next, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3806) for setting a fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 variable display game, and a fluctuation start information setting process (A3806) for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 variable display game ( (A3807), a high-probability-variation-number update process for updating and managing the number of variations (remaining number) of the special figure variation display game started in the high-probability state is executed (A3808), and the special figure 1 variation start process ends.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3702) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 39A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag 1 area of the RWM (A3901a), and saves the deviation information in the large hit flag 1 area of the RWM (A3902a). Subsequently, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) of the RWM and prepared (A3903a). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting memory having the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest in special figure 1). After that, the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904a).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit, that is, whether big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A3905a). When the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A3905a is "N"), a big hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is executed based on the obtained big hit random number value (A3906a). ), it is determined whether or not the determination result is a big hit (A3907a). When the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3907a is "Y"), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the deviation information is saved in step A3902a (A3908a), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed. finish. The big hit flag 1 can be a big hit only when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area), so that the big hit flag 1 and the big hit flag 2 are prevented from being a big hit at the same time. ..

If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A3905a is “Y”), or if the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A3907a is “N”), the game control device 100 obtains it. Based on the hit big random number value, a small hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit is executed (A3909a), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a small hit ( A3910a). In this embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment (in other words, the same random number value is used for the small hit judgment and the big hit judgment). If the special display 1 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A3910a is “Y”), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area in which the deviation information is saved in step A3901a (A3911a), The jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. If the special display 1 variable display game is not a small hit (the result of A3910a is "N"), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3802) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 39B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.

In the big hit flag 2 setting process, in the big hit flag 1 setting process (FIG. 39A), "small hit flag 1" is set to "small hit flag 2", "big hit flag 1" is set to "big hit flag 2", and "big hit flag 2". Is replaced with "big hit flag 1" and "special figure 1" is replaced with "special figure 2". Since the same processing as the big hit flag 1 setting processing is performed, detailed description will be omitted. Note that steps A3901b to A3911b in the jackpot flag 2 setting process correspond to steps A3901a to A3911a in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, respectively.

[Big hit determination processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination processing (A3906a, A3906b) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing, the jackpot flag 2 setting processing, and the like will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. The big hit judging process is a process common to the big hit judging process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3103 of the special figure reservation information judging process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A4001), and determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A4002). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A4002 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a deviation (other than big hit) as a judgment result (A4007), and ends the big hit judgment process. To do.

Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A4002 is “N”), the game control device 100 judges whether or not the probability of occurrence of hit is high probability (A4003). .. If it is in the high probability state (result of A4003 is “Y”), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (A4004). On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (result of A4003 is “N”), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (A4005).

After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the big hit random number, the game control device 100 judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (A4006). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A4007). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is “N”), the big hit is set as the judgment result (A4008). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3909a, A3909b) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination processing is common to the small hit determination processing in other processing executed during the timer interrupt processing, and is also executed in step A3107 of the special figure reservation information determination processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or larger than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and is the upper limit of the small hit judgment value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit.

As a matter of course, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) should be the same as the above big hit judgment in order to avoid that the same special figure variable display game result is a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In this embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the big hit random number is used for the determination of the small hit. However, a unique small hit random number may be provided.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (result of A4101 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a deviation as the determination result (A4106) and ends the small hit determination process. ..

When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not information is being set regarding the special figure 1 variable display game. Yes (A4102). Then, when information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (result of A4102 is “Y”), a small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 variable display game is set (A4103). On the other hand, when the information regarding the special figure 1 variable display game is not being set (the result of A4102 is “N”), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 2 variable display game is set (A4104).

After setting the small hit upper limit judgment value, the game control device 100 judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (A4105). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4105 is “Y”), deviation is set as the judgment result (A4106). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4105 is “N”), the small hit is set as the judgment result (A4107). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

FIG. 42 shows a jackpot probability (probability that the determination result will be a jackpot), a small hit probability (probability that the determination result will be a jackpot), and a deviation probability (determination result will be a deviation) by the above-described jackpot determination processing and small hit determination processing Probability) for the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. 42A shows the probability in the low probability state, and FIG. 42B shows the probability in the high probability state.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot probability (probability of jackpot occurrence) is higher in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. The small hit probability (probability of small hit) is the same in the high-probability state and the low-probability state. The loss probability (probability of occurrence of loss) is lower in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit probability is common to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 2 variable display game. The deviation probability is lower in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 1 variable display game (in the high probability state, the deviation probability is 0 in the special figure 2 variable display game). Therefore, since the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 is more advantageous to the player than the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (particularly with respect to the small hit probability), the above-mentioned special figure 2 abnormality variation monitoring processing Is executed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, FIG. 6A, and FIG. 6B, the jackpot symbol is only a probability variation symbol, and after the jackpot state (special game state) ends, it is a high probability state (probability variation state) without exception, and a probability variation rush. The rate is 100%. The high-probability state continues until the variable display game is started a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the jackpot is over.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3703) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit, that is, whether or not big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A4301a). When the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A4301a is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4302a). Next, the special figure 1 big hit design table is set (A4303a), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired, and the special figure 1 stop design save area of the RWM is saved (A4304a). By this processing, the type of special result is selected.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4305a), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4306a). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special symbol 1 display device 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area of the RWM (A4307a), and the big winning corresponding to the stop symbol number. The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 special winning mouth opening information area of the RWM (A4308a). Then, the process proceeds to step A4316a. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4301a is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the small hit flag 1 is a small hit, that is, the small hit information is in the small hit flag 1 area. It is determined whether it is saved (A4309a). When the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (the result of A4309a is "Y"), a small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (A4310a). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol design table is set (A4311a), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the special symbol 1 stop symbol save area is saved (A4312a). By this processing, the type of specific result is selected. Then, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4313a). Then, the process proceeds to step A4316a.

If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (the result of A4309a is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of the loss in the special symbol 1 stop symbol save area (A4314a), and the loss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4315a). Then, the process proceeds to step A4316a.

After the steps A4308a, A4313a, and A4315a, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4316a). In addition, the stop symbol pattern is the outlier symbol of FIG. 5, a plurality of big hit symbols (4R probability variation A2, 8R probability variation A3, 16R probability variation A1, 16R probability variation B1-B3), and a small hit symbol (special figure 1 small hit). It corresponds to either. By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the decoration special figure 1 command as a production command in the decoration special figure 1 command area (A4317a), and executes the production command setting process (A4318a). The decoration special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4319a), and clears the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) to 0 (A4320a). ), the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) is cleared to 0 (A4321a). After that, the special figure 1 stop design setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3803) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing.

Special figure 2 stop design setting processing, in the special figure 1 stop design setting processing (Figure 43A) "small hit flag 1" to "small hit flag 2", "big hit flag 1" to "big hit flag 2", " "Special figure 1" is replaced with "special figure 2", and the same processing as the special figure 1 stopped symbol setting processing is performed, and thus detailed description will be omitted. Note that steps A4301b-A4321b in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process correspond to steps A4301a-A4321a in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, respectively.

Note that the stop symbol pattern set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the outlier symbol of FIGS. 6A and 6B, a plurality of jackpot symbols (2R probability variation D1, 4R probability variation D3, 8R probability variation E2, 16R probability variation E1, F2, F3), and any of a plurality of small hit symbols (special figure 2 small hit 1-3). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first starting winning opening 36, and the game ball at the second starting winning opening 37 A variable display game executing means for executing the special figure 2 variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection is formed. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special map 1 information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3704) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A4401). When it is not in the high-probability state (in the low-probability state) (result of A4401 is “N”), the variation pattern selection information table is set (A4402). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 are acquired (A4403).

Here, the first-half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for allocating the first-half fluctuations, and the second-half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for allocating the latter-half fluctuations. The first-half fluctuation is a fluctuation mode before the start of the reach, and the second-half fluctuation is a fluctuation mode after the reach state is reached and corresponds to the type of reach (including normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4404), and when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4404 is "N"). ), it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (A4405).

When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A4405 is “Y”), the game control device 100 specially displays the latter half offset data in order to distribute the latter half variation in accordance with the number of special figure 1 holdings. The value is updated by adding the 1-holding number and updating the value (A4406), and the value is converted by adding the 1-chart 1 holding number to the first-half offset data in order to distribute the first-half fluctuation according to the Toku-zu 1 holding number. When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a small hit (in the case of a hit) (the result of A4405 is “N”), the processing of step A4406 is not performed, and the special figure 1 hold number is added only to the first-half offset data. The value is converted (A4407).

When the result of the special display 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4404 is “Y”), the game control device 100 does not perform the processes of steps A4405-A4407, and the first half offset data and the second half offset acquired in step A4403. Without updating or converting the data, the process proceeds to step A4412.

On the other hand, in the high-probability state (result of A4401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4408). When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4408 is “N”), the first half offset data for the off/small hit of special figure 1 at the time of high probability is set (A4409), and the process of step A4411 Move to. When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4408 is "Y"), the first half offset data for the big hit of special figure 1 at the time of high probability is set (A4410). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for long-term fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game is set (A4411). As a result, in the high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game is changed for a long time.

After step A4404, A4407, or A4411, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4412), and the second half offset data (variable distribution information). The information 2) is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4413), and the special figure 1 information setting process is ended.

[Special map 2 information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A4501). When it is in the high probability state (result of A4501 is “N”), the variation pattern selection information table is set (A4502). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 are acquired (A4503). The first-half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for allocating the first-half fluctuation, and the second-half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for allocating the second-half fluctuation.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is not in the high-probability state (in the low-probability state) (result of A4501 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A4504). .. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4504 is "N"), the first half offset data for the off/small hit of special figure 2 at the time of low probability is set (A4505), and the process of step A4507 Move to. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4504 is “Y”), the first half offset data for the big hit of special figure 2 at a low probability is set (A4506). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is set (A4507). As a result, in the low probability state, the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a long time variation (long variation).

After step A4503 or A4507, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4508), and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2). The data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4509), and the special figure 2 information setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3706) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets the fluctuation group address table (A4601), acquires the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 and prepares (A4602), and the fluctuation pattern random number of special figure 1 The variable pattern random number 1 is loaded as a random number from the 1 storage area (for the number of holding 1) and prepared (A4603).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a failure (A4604). When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of alignment (the result of A4604 is “Y”), the 2-byte distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4605), and the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of alignment. If not (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A4604 is "N"), the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4606).

The structure of the second-half variation group table is different for hitting and deviating, and the random number for distribution has a 1-byte size for hitting and a 2-byte size for deviating. The hit size is 1 byte in order to save the data capacity, but 1 byte is sufficient because the appearance rate itself of the special figure 1 variable display game is low. In the case of a win (in the case of a big hit or a small hit), only the lower value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used.

After step A4605 or A4606, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution (A4607). Subsequently, the variation pattern random number 2 is stored as a random number from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for holding number 1) of the special figure 1 (A4608), and the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4609). .. Then, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (A4610). Through the above processing, the latter half variation pattern is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4611), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4612). Then, the address of the first-half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4613). Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) of the special figure 1 as a random number and prepared (A4614), and the distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4615).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the first-half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution, saves it in the first-half variation number area (A4616), and ends the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. By the above process, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3806) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets the latter half fluctuation selection address table (A4701), acquires the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 and prepares it (A4702). Then, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area of the special figure 2 to prepare (A4703), and the distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4704). Then, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (A4705). Through the above processing, the latter half variation pattern is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4706), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4707). Subsequently, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4708). Furthermore, the variable pattern random number 3 is loaded as a random number from the variable pattern random number 3 storage area of the special figure 2 to prepare (A4709), and the distribution processing based on the variable pattern random number 3 is executed (A4710).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the first-half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution, saves it in the first-half variation number area (A4711), and ends the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. By the above process, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

[2-byte sorting process]
Next, details of the 2-byte sorting process (A4605) in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of 2-byte allocation processing. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure 1 variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the first data of the latter half variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (A4801), It is determined whether or not the code is not distributed (A4802).

Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table (for example, a part of the variable group table when the result is out of order), it is not necessary to sort, so the sorting value “0”, that is, the code without sorting is defined at the beginning. ..

Then, when the first data of the second half variable group table is a code without distribution (the result of A4802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (A4807). ) End the 2-byte sorting process.

On the other hand, when the top data of the latter half variation group table is not a code without distribution (result of A4802 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 defines one distribution value initially defined in the latter half variation group table. Is obtained (A4803).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in the process of step A4803 from the random number value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) loaded in the process of step A4603 of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. Then, a new random number value is calculated (A4804). Further, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4805).

If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (result of A4805 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the next distribution value (A4806), and then the process of step A4803 and thereafter. To execute. That is, the distribution value defined next in the variable group selection table is acquired (A4803), the distribution value is subtracted using the random number value determined in the process of step A4805 as a new random value, and a new random value is added. Is calculated (A4804). Then, with respect to the calculated new random number value, each process is executed until it is determined in the process of step A4805 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4805 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half fluctuation selection table defined in the latter half fluctuation group table.

Then, when the new random number value is smaller than “0” (result of A4805 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the data address corresponding to the sorted result (A4807), 2 bytes. The sorting process ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, the details of the distribution process (A4606, A4609, A4615, A4704, A4710) in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of distribution processing. The distribution process is performed by selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1 or from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2. Processing for selecting the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game, or for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game based on the variation pattern random number 3 from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) Is.

In the game control device 100, first, the prepared first half variation group table (selection table), the second half variation selection table (selection table), and the first half variation selection table (selection table) have no distribution data (that is, " 0") is checked (A4901), and it is determined whether the code is a code without distribution (A4902).

Here, the latter half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table, like the latter half variation group table, store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half variation pattern and first half variation pattern, but it is necessary to sort them. In the case of a selection table that does not have a distribution table, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the beginning.

Then, when the first data of the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (the result of A4902 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines the distribution result. The address of the corresponding data is updated (A4907), and the distribution process ends.

On the other hand, when the first data of the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is not a code without distribution (the result of A4902 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 determines the latter half variation group table or The first distribution value specified in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired (A4903).

Next, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in step A4903 from the loaded random number value (variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3) to calculate a new random number value (A4904). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4905).

When the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (result of A4905 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the next distribution value (A4906), and executes the processing of step A4903 and thereafter. Execute. That is, the distribution value defined next in the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is acquired (A4903), and the distribution value is determined as a new random number value determined in step A4905. Subtraction is performed and a new random number value is calculated (A4904). Then, the process is executed until it is determined that the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4905 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the second half variation number and the first half variation number is selected from at least one of the second half variation pattern and the first half variation pattern defined in the latter half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table.

Then, when the new random number value is smaller than "0" (result of A4905 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the data address corresponding to the sorted result (A4907), and the sorting process. To finish.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3707, A3807) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not information is being set regarding the special figure 1 variable display game (A5001). When information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (result of A5001 is "Y"), the random number storage areas (for reserved balls 1) of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the special figure 1 used are cleared (A5002). ). When the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5001 is "N"), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, so the random number of the variation pattern random numbers 2 to 3 of the special figure 2 used The storage area is cleared (A5003).

After the steps A5002 and A5003, the game control device 100 sets the first-half variation time value table (A5004) and acquires the first-half variation time value corresponding to the first-half variation number (A5005). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A5006), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A5007).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A5008), and saves the added value in the target special figure game processing timer area (A5009). Then, it is determined whether or not information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5010). When the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5010 is “N”), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, so the long fluctuation (long-term variation) of the special figure 2 variable display game is being performed. It is determined whether or not to start (A5011).

When the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is not started (result of A5011 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves 0 in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5012), When the long fluctuation of the 2-variation display game is started (result of A5011 is “Y”), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5013). In the long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation time (for example, 10 minutes) that is not sufficient for the 2-byte timer is varied, so the predetermined number of repetitions (9 here) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is the number of repetitions. Set to the area. In a timer interrupt process with an interrupt cycle of 4 msec (millisecond), a 2-byte timer can set up to about 262 seconds.

For example, when a timer of 60,000 msec (60 seconds) is set by saving the above added value in the special figure game processing timer area and the number of times of repeating 9 times is further saved, timer interrupt processing (particularly, the special figure 2 The timer is decremented in the game process (FIG. 33) (A3303), and when the time is up (result of A3304 is “Y”), the number of repetitions is decremented by 1 (A3306), and the long variation timer is added to the game process timer. A value of 60000 ms (60 seconds) is set. As a result, it is possible to set the long fluctuation time special game 2 fluctuation display game to a long fluctuation time of 60000 msec+(60000 msec×9)=10 minutes.

The variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game when it is not a long variation (the number of repetitions=0) are the first half variation saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5009. It is the sum of the time value and the latter half fluctuation time value.

When the information regarding the special figure 1 variable display game is being set (result of A5010 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to step A5014 without setting the number of times of repetition of the timer.

After the steps A5010, A5012, A5013, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A5014) and a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (A5015). .. Then, the effect command setting process for transmitting the variation command as the effect command is executed (A5016).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not information is being set regarding the special figure 1 variable display game (A5017). When information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (result of A5017 is "Y"), the special figure 1 hold number is updated by -1 (A5018), and the contents of the random number storage area related to the special figure 1 variable display game are set. Is shifted (A5019), and the empty area after the shift is cleared (A5020). When the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5017 is “N”), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, so that the contents of the random number storage area are not shifted (see FIG. Since the number of reservations is 1, the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random number values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a fluctuation pattern determination means capable of determining the fluctuation pattern of the identification information executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the decorative special figure variation display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information on the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. Variable commands including information about patterns are given, and these commands are transmitted to the performance control device 300. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special drawing command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[High probability change count update process]
Next, details of the high-probability fluctuation number update processing (A3717, A3808) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the high-probability change count updating process. In the high-probability variation number update processing, the variation number of the special figure variation display game started in the high-probability state (here, the high-probability variation number as the remaining variation number) is updated.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A5101). If it is not in the high-probability state (in the low-probability state) (result of A5101 is “N”), the high-probability fluctuation number update processing is ended.

In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, it is in a low-probability state (can be set to a low-probability state by a fanfare/interval processing shift setting process described later). That is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, not only the special figure 1 variable display game but also the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in a low probability state, and the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit. Not only the variable display game of FIG. 2 but also the variable display game of FIG. 1 is executed in a low probability state. When the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, there is a possibility of a high probability state, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in a high probability state. It may be executed.

When in the high probability state (result of A5101 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the high probability variation number indicating the remaining number of the special figure variation display game started in the high probability state by -1 (1 (A5102). The initial value of the number of high-probability fluctuations is the number of fluctuations in which the high-probability state is maintained after the big hit ends, and is set to, for example, 50 times (special figure 1 big hit end processing or special figure 2 big hit end processing described later). ). In addition, regardless of whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts fluctuating, the number of high-probability fluctuations is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (A5103). When the number of times of high probability variation is not 0 (the result of A5103 is “N”), that is, when the high probability state continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the high probability variation number updating process is ended. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (the result of A5103 is “Y”), a signal regarding the end of the high probability (off data of two big hits) is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A5104). Further, a signal relating to the high probability & shortening of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5105). High probability & signal regarding the end of time saving, for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 2 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal off data, special symbol 2 variation This is the off data of the time reduction state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area of the RWM (A5106), and saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (( (A5107), the high-probability final variation flag corresponding to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to start the variation is set (A5108), and the high-probability variation number updating process is terminated.

The high-probability final fluctuation flag is information for indicating that the fluctuation has started during the high probability even during the low probability. In the high-probability final fluctuation (high-probability final fluctuation), unless the probability is lowered to a low probability immediately after the fluctuation starts, the winning judgment based on the starting mouth winning during the final fluctuation is performed with a high probability. Therefore, when the fluctuation of the high-probability final fluctuation is started, the hit probability is set to a low probability by the special map low probability & no time saving flag. Therefore, the high-probability final variation flag is set and used to determine whether or not there is a high-probability final variation (for example, in steps A2714, A3515, A3608, A3709, etc.). The high-probability final fluctuation flag also includes information that can determine which of the high-probability final fluctuations of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is the high-probability final fluctuation.

As described above, after the big hit, the high probability state is maintained until the predetermined number of times (the initial value of the high probability variation number, for example, 50 times) of the variable display game is started, and the high probability variation number=0 and the predetermined number of times. When the eye fluctuation display game (high-probability final fluctuation) is started, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is set, the low probability state is reached and the time saving state is ended, and the high probability final fluctuation flag is set. Is set.

[Special figure 1 processing transition setting processing during fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure 1 mid-fluctuation process transition setting process (A3517) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special process 1 changing process transition setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets "1" as a process number in order to shift to the special figure 1 changing process (A5201a), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A5202a). Subsequently, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (A5203a), and the signal regarding the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 (ON data of the special symbol 1 changing signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5204a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the changing flag in the special figure 1 change control flag area (A5205a). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blink control timer (the timer of the blinking period of the special display 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (A5206a), and the special figure 1 changing symbol number area The initial value of the changing symbol number (for example, 0 indicating the non-illuminated symbol in FIG. 5) is saved in (A5207a), and the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 processing transition setting processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (A3610) in the special figure 2 normal process will be described. FIG. 52B is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process.

Special figure 2 process transition setting process during change, the special process 1 transition process during special process (Fig. 52A) "special figure 1" (special symbol 1) is replaced with "special figure 2" (special symbol 2) Since the same process as the special figure 1 changing process shift setting process is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that steps A5201b to A5207b in the special figure 2 changing process shift setting process correspond to steps A5201a to A5207a in the special figure 1 changing process shift setting process, respectively.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure 1 changing process (A3209) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the processing during fluctuation of Toku-zu 1.

The game control device 100 first updates the symbol confirmation count output count by +1 (A5301). The symbol determination frequency output frequency is used in the symbol determination frequency signal editing process described later. Next, the decoration special drawing 1 command is loaded from the decoration special drawing 1 command area and prepared as a performance command (A5302), and a performance command setting process is executed (A5303). After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5304), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5305).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (high-probability final variation) (A5306). If the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set in step A5108 of the high-probability fluctuation number update processing, it can be determined that the high-probability final fluctuation is high. When the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (the result of A5306 is “Y”), as the stop symbol display time (stop display time) of the special figure 1, the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 The corresponding display time is set (A5307). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is a deviant symbol of special figure 1, 2000 msec if the big hit symbol of special symbol 1, and 136 msec if the small hit symbol of special symbol 1. is there.

When the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5306 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the display time at the high-probability final variation as the display time of the special figure 1. (A5308). For example, the display time at the time of high probability final fluctuation is 7000 msec.

After the steps A5307 and A5308, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a failure (A5309). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is off (the result of A5309 is “Y”), the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of off) is the special figure 1 stop symbol It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324).

If the result of the special display 1 variable display game is not off (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A5309 is “N”), the game control device 100 is also changing the special map 2 (also in the special display 2 variable display game. It is determined whether or not it is being executed (A5310). Toku-zu 2 is not changing (result of A5310 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5320. When the Toku-zu 2 is also changing (result of A5310 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the below-mentioned Toku-zu 2 displaying process is being executed (A5311).

When the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (the result of A5311 is “Y”), the game control device 100 moves to the process of step A5313. When the special figure 2 display processing is not being executed (result of A5311 is “N”), the symbol decision count output count is updated by +1 (A5312). Next, as the display time of the special figure 2, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 1 (display time of the special figure 1+4 msec) is set (A5313), and is displayed in the special process game processing timer area. Save time (A5314). Here, 4 msec is the interrupt period (predetermined time period) of the timer interrupt process. 4 msec is added because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 2 game processing (4 msec corresponding to the interrupt period is subtracted) (A3303), so that it is added. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 and the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 can be aligned. It should be noted that if the stop display of Toku-zu 2 has already been started, the display time will be reset here (the display time is basically extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the falling pattern command of the decorative special drawing 2 as a production command (A5315), and executes production command setting processing (A5316). Then, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5317), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5318). After that, the special figure 2 in-display process shift setting process 2 for setting to execute the special figure 2 in-process is executed (A5319).

By the processing of steps A5313 to A5319, the result of deviation of the special figure 2 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 2 variable display game) is set in the special figure 1 changing process which is the control relating to the special figure 1 variable display game. The execution of the special figure 2 displaying process (end of the special figure 2 variable display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is running (during change of special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variable display game has a hit result (big hit or small hit), the special figure 2 variable display game Is forced to end the fluctuation (forced termination) as a result of the deviation.

The special figure 1 changing process is performed at the end of the changing time, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5009) is up (A3204). Since the result is executed "Y"), when the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended (forced end).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special drawing 1 command from the decoration special drawing 1 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5320). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (A5321). Special Figure 1 If the result of the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5321 is "Y"), the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of a small hit) is special figure 1 It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324).

When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a small hit (when it is a big hit) (the result of A5321 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines the upper limit of the number of rounds from the above-mentioned special figure 1 upper limit number of rounds value information area. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit value information area (A5322).
The special winning opening opening information is loaded from the aforementioned special figure 1 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A5323). Then, the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of a big hit) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324). Next, the special figure 1 display process shift setting process 1 for setting the special figure 1 display process is executed (A5325), and the special figure 1 changing process is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) that sets the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, even if the game control device 100 is running the special figure 2 variable display game (during change of special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variable display game hits, the special figure 2 variable display game is disengaged. It constitutes a forced termination means that is forced to terminate as a result.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure 2 changing process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process.

The game control device 100 first updates the symbol confirmation count output count by +1 (A5401). The symbol determination frequency output frequency is used in the symbol determination frequency signal editing process described later. Next, the decoration special drawing 2 command is loaded from the decoration special drawing 2 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5402), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5403). After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5404), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5405).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started is a high-probability final fluctuation (high-probability final fluctuation) (A5406). If the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set in step A5108 of the high-probability fluctuation number update processing, it can be determined that the high-probability final fluctuation is high. If the special figure 2 variation display game to start is not a high-probability final variation (the result of A5406 is “N”), the stop symbol display time of the special figure 2 (stop display time) corresponds to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 The display time to be set is set (A5407). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is a deviating symbol of the special figure 2, 600 msec if the big hit symbol of the special symbol 2, and 600 msec if the small hit symbol of the special symbol 2. is there. In addition, the display time of the outlier symbol, the big hit symbol, and the small hit symbol of the special figure 2 is the same.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started is a high-probability final fluctuation (the result of A5406 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the display time at the time of high-probability final fluctuation as the display time of special figure 2. (A5408). For example, the display time at the time of high probability final fluctuation is 7000 msec.

After steps A5407 and A5408, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a failure (A5409). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is off (the result of A5409 is “Y”), the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of off) is the special figure 2 stop symbol. It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5424).

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of order (the result of A5410 is “N”), the game control device 100 is also changing the special figure 1 (also executing the special figure 1 variable display game). Is determined (A5410). Toku-zu 1 is not changing (result of A5410 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5420. If the Toku-zu 1 is also changing (result of A5410 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the below-mentioned Toku-zu 1 displaying process is being executed (A5411).

When the special figure 1 displaying process is being executed (the result of A5411 is “Y”), the game control device 100 moves to the process of step A5413. When the special figure 1 displaying process is not being executed (the result of A5411 is “N”), the symbol decision count output count is updated by +1 (A5412). Subsequently, as the display time of the special figure 1, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 2 (display time of the special figure 2+4 msec) is set (A5413) and displayed in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. Save the time (A5414). Here, 4 msec is the interrupt period (predetermined time period) of the timer interrupt process. 4 msec is added because the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 1 game processing (4 msec corresponding to the interrupt period is subtracted) (A3203), so that it is added. As a result, the display time of the actual stop symbol of special figure 2 and the display time of the stop symbol of special figure 1 can be made equal. If the stop display of the special figure 1 has already started, the display time is reset here (the display time is basically extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the falling pattern command of the decoration special figure 1 as an effect command (A5415), and executes an effect command setting process (A5416). Then, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5417), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5418). After that, the special figure 1 in-display process shift setting process 2 for setting the special figure 1 in-process is executed (A5419).

By the processes of steps A5413 to A5419, the result of deviation of the special figure 1 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) is set in the special figure 2 changing process which is the control relating to the special figure 2 variable display game. The execution of the special figure 1 display process (end of the special figure 1 variable display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is running (during change of special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game has a hit result (big hit or small hit), the special figure 1 variable display game Is forced to end the fluctuation (end of execution) as a result of the deviation.

The special figure 2 changing process is performed at the end of the changing time, that is, when the special figure 2 game processing timer has repeated 0 times and the special figure 2 game processing timer is up (results of A3304 and A3305). Is executed for "Y"), the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly ended in variation (end of execution) when the special result 2 variable display game in which the hit result changes.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special drawing 2 command from the decoration special drawing 2 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5420). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (A5421). Special Figure 2 If the result of the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5421 is "Y"), the information (stop symbol number at the time of a small hit) saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process described above is special figure 2 It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5424).

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (when it is a big hit) (the result of A5421 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines the upper limit of the number of rounds from the aforementioned special figure 2 upper limit number of rounds information area. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit value information area (A5422).
The special winning opening opening information is loaded from the aforementioned special figure 2 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A5423). Then, the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5424). Next, the special figure 2 in-display process shift setting process 1 for setting the special figure 2 in-process is executed (A5425), and the special figure 2 changing process is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) that sets the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, even if the game control device 100 is running the special figure 1 variable display game (during change of the special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game is a hit result, the special figure 1 variable display game is disengaged. It constitutes a forced termination means that is forced to terminate as a result.

[Special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, details of the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 1 (A5325) in the special figure 1 changing process will be described. FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special process 1 display processing transition setting process 1.

The game control device 100 first sets "2" as a process number in order to shift to the special figure 1 display process (A5501a), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A5502a). A signal related to the end of fluctuation of FIG. 1 (off data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5503a).

Next, the game control device 100, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the variation stop on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 variation control flag. The data is saved in the area (A5504a), and the special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 1 ends.

[Special figure 2 display transition process setting process 1]
Next, details of the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1 (A5425) in the special figure 2 changing process will be described. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 1.

The game control device 100 first sets “2” as the process number to shift to the process during display of the special figure 2 (A5501b), saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A5502b), The signal related to the end of fluctuation of FIG. 2 (off data of the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5503b).

Next, the game control device 100, as the information for controlling the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52, is the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag. The data is saved in the area (A5504b), and the special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 1 ends.

[Special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, details of the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 2 (A5419) in the special figure 2 changing process will be described. FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special process 1 display process shift setting process 2. In the special figure 1 in-display process shift setting process 2, information is set when the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly ended by hitting the special figure 2 variable display game.

The game control device 100 first sets "2" as a process number in order to shift to the process of displaying the special figure 1 (A5601a), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A5602a). The signal relating to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (A5603a). Subsequently, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, a stop flag related to a variation stop on the special figure 1 display device 51 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (A5604a). ).

Next, the game control device 100 shifts to the stop symbol pattern area, saves the stop symbol pattern (A5605a), clears the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (A5606a), and the special figure 1 special winning opening opening information area. Is cleared (A5607a). Further, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (A5608a), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A5609a). Subsequently, the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (A5610a), and the deviation stop symbol number (stop symbol number at the time of deviation) is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5611a). By the above processing, the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 becomes a variable stop (variation end) with a stop symbol which is out of order.

[Special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, details of the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 2 (A5319) in the special figure 1 changing process will be described. FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2. In the special figure 2 during-display process shift setting process 2, information is set when the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended by hitting the special figure 1 variable display game.

The game control device 100 first sets "2" as a process number in order to shift to the special figure 2 displaying process (A5601b), and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A5602b). The signal relating to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (A5603b). Subsequently, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game on the special figure 2 display device 52, a stop flag related to the variation stop on the special figure 2 display device 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (A5604b). ).

Next, the game control device 100 shifts to the stop symbol pattern area, saves the stop symbol pattern (A5605b), clears the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (A5606b), and the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area. Is cleared (A5607b). Further, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (A5608b), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A5609b). Subsequently, the special figure 2 stop symbol save area is cleared (A5610b), and the deviation stop symbol number (stop symbol number at the time of deviation) is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5611b). By the above-described processing, the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display device 52 is a variation stop (variation end) with a stop symbol which is out of order.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
Next, details of the special figure 1 displaying process (A3210) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. 57A and 57B are flowcharts showing the procedure of processing during display of special figure 1. 57A shows the first half of the processing during the display of the special figure 1, and FIG. 57B shows the latter half of the processing during the display of the special figure 1.

The game control device 100 first loads the small hit flag 1 (which indicates small hit information or deviance information) from the small hit flag 1 area (A5701), and clears the small hit flag 1 area (A5702). Subsequently, the big hit flag 1 (which indicates big hit information or deviance information) is loaded from the big hit flag 1 area (A5703), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (A5704). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 1 (A5705).

When the result of the Toku-zu 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A5705 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the start of the Toku-zu 1 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5706). ). For example, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit is the ON data of the condition device operating signal, the ON data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and the ON data of the special symbol 1 signal. Subsequently, the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared as an effect command (A5707), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5708).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a round number upper limit value table (A5709), and obtains the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area from the round number upper limit value table. It is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM (A5710). The upper limit number of rounds is, for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R. Then, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information of the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5711).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area and prepares it as an effect command (A5712), and executes an effect command setting process (A5713). Since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Then, a fanfare command is prepared as a production command (A5714), and production command setting processing is executed (A5715).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability in the external information output data area (A5716). The signals here are, for example, two big hit signals and three big hit signals that are turned on or off depending on conditions. For example, jackpot 2 signal is turned on in jackpots other than 2R, turned on in 2R jackpot in high probability, turned off in 2R jackpot in low probability, jackpot 3 signal is turned on in jackpots other than 2R, high probability It turns off with the 2R jackpot in the middle, and turns on with the 2R jackpot in the low probability.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a big hit fanfare time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (A5717), and saves the big hit fanfare time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5718). Next, based on the special winning opening opening information, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to open the upper special winning opening (A5719).

If the game control device 100 is a jackpot for opening the upper special winning opening (the result of A5719 is "Y"), the upper special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (A5720), and the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period of RWM. The flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flag area (A5721), and "3" is set as the process number to shift to the fanfare/interval processing (A5724). If it is not a big hit of the upper special prize opening (the result of A5719 is "N"), the lower special prize oral fraud number area is cleared (A5722), and the fraudulent monitoring period flag area of the RWM lower special winning mouth is outside the fraud monitoring period. The flag is saved (A5723), and "3" is set as the processing number to shift to the fanfare/interval processing (A5724).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A5725), executes the fanfare/inter-interval process shift setting process (A5726), and ends the special figure 1 displaying process. ..

On the other hand, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A5705 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines that the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit based on the small hit flag 1. Whether or not (whether or not the small hit flag 1 is a small hit) is determined (A5727). When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5727 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game executed this time is a high-probability final change (A5728). When the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (result of A5728 is “Y”), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared as a production command (A5729), and production command setting processing is executed. Yes (A5730).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the RWM power failure recovery transmission command area (A5731), and clears the left-hand instruction command notification flag (A5732). In the power failure recovery transmission command area, the command output to the performance control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery is saved. After that, the hit symbol command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5733), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5734). Since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit, this winning symbol command corresponds to the small hit symbol. On the other hand, the game control device 100, if the special figure 1 variation display game this time is not the high-probability final variation (the result of A5728 is “N”), does not perform the processing of steps A5729 to A5732, and the winning symbol from the winning symbol command area. A command is loaded and prepared as an effect command (A5733), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5734).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5735), and executes an effect command setting process (A5736). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is a high probability state (A5737). When it is not in the high probability state (the result of A5737 is “N”), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (OFF data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5738), and the right-handed time is confirmed. In order to turn off the second gaming state display portion 56 (lamps D8 to D10) to be notified, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area of the RWM (A5739). If it is in a high probability state (the result of A5737 is “Y”), the signal related to the right-handing instruction (ON data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5740), and it is the time of right-handing. In order to turn on the second gaming state display portion 56 (lamps D8-D10) that informs that, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5741).

After the steps A5739 and A5741, the gaming control device 100 clears the lower special winning opening fraud prize number area (A5742), saves the fraud monitoring period outside flag in the lower special winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (A5743), Toku-zu 1 small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing is executed (A5744), and Toku-zu 1 displaying processing ends.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a small hit (when the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit) (the result of A5727 is "N"), that is, the special figure 1 variable display game. If the result is negative, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (A5745). If it is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5745 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5753.

When the probability change is high (the result of A5745 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (low probability) as an effect command (A5746), and executes effect command setting processing (A5747). .. Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (A5748), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (A5749). After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in the small hit state (A5750). If the special display 2 variable display game is in the small hit state (result of A5750 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A5753.

If the special control 2 variable display game is not in the small hit state (the result of A5750 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left-handing instruction in the test signal output data area (A5751). Then, in order to turn off the second gaming state display portion 56 (lamps D8-D10) for notifying that it is right-handed, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5752). , Clearing the change of special map 1 in the special map status area (information subtraction) (A5753). After that, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order, the special figure 1 normal process shift setting process 1 is executed (A5754), and the special figure 1 displaying process is ended. In the special figure 1 normal process shift setting process 1, "0" is set as the process number to shift to the special process 1 normal process, and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
Next, details of the special figure 2 displaying process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 58A and FIG. 58B are flowcharts showing the procedure of processing during display of special figure 2. FIG. 58A shows the first half of the processing during display of the special figure 2, and FIG. 58B shows the second half of the processing during display of the special figure 2.

The game control device 100 first loads the small hit flag 2 (indicating small hit information or deviance information) from the small hit flag 2 area (A5801) and clears the small hit flag 2 area (A5802). Then, the big hit flag 2 (which shows big hit information or deviance information) is loaded from the big hit flag 2 area (A5803), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (A5804). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 2 (A5805).

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A5805 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5806). ). For example, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit is the ON data of the condition device operating signal, the ON data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and the ON data of the special symbol 2 per signal. Subsequently, the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared as an effect command (A5807), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5808).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a round number upper limit value table (A5809), and obtains the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area from the round number upper limit value table. It is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM (A5810). The upper limit number of rounds is, for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R. Then, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5811).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area and prepares it as an effect command (A5812), and executes an effect command setting process (A5813). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Then, a fanfare command is prepared as a production command (A5814), and production command setting processing is executed (A5815).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability in the external information output data area (A5816). The signals here are, for example, two big hit signals and three big hit signals that are turned on or off depending on conditions. For example, jackpot 2 signal is turned on in jackpots other than 2R, turned on in 2R jackpot in high probability, turned off in 2R jackpot in low probability, jackpot 3 signal is turned on in jackpots other than 2R, high probability It turns off with the 2R jackpot in the middle, and turns on with the 2R jackpot in the low probability.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a big hit fanfare time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (A5817), and saves the big hit fanfare time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A5818). Next, based on the special winning opening opening information, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the upper special winning opening (A5819).

When the game control device 100 is a jackpot for opening the upper special winning opening (the result of A5819 is "Y"), the upper special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (A5820), and the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period of the RWM. The flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flag area (A5821), and "3" is set as the process number in order to shift to the fanfare/interval processing (A5824). If it is not a big hit for opening the upper special winning opening (the result of A5819 is “N”), the lower special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (A5822) and the fraud monitoring period in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area of the RWM is out of the fraud monitoring period. The flag is saved (A5823), and "3" is set as the process number to shift to the fanfare/interval interval process (A5824).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A5825), executes the fanfare/inter-interval processing shift setting processing (A5826), and ends the special figure 2 displaying processing. ..

On the other hand, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A5805 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines that the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit based on the small hit flag 2. It is determined whether or not (whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit) (A5827). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5827 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game executed this time is a high-probability final change (A5828). When the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (result of A5828 is “Y”), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared as a production command (A5829), and production command setting processing is executed. Yes (A5830).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the RWM power failure recovery transmission command area (A5831), and clears the left-handed instruction notification flag (A5832). After that, the hit symbol command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5833), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5834). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, this winning symbol command corresponds to the small hit symbol. On the other hand, when the current special figure 2 variation display game is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5828 is “N”), the game control device 100 does not perform the processing of steps A5829 to A5832, and issues a command from the winning symbol command area. A winning symbol is loaded and prepared as an effect command (A5833), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5834).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5835), and executes an effect command setting process (A5836). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is a high probability state (A5837). When it is not in the high probability state (the result of A5837 is “N”), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (OFF data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5838), and the right-handed state is confirmed. In order to turn off the second gaming state display portion 56 (lamps D8-D10) to be notified, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5839). In the case of high probability state (result of A5837 is “Y”), the signal regarding right-handing instruction (ON data of firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5840), and right-handing is performed. In order to turn on the second gaming state display portion 56 (lamps D8-D10) for informing, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5841).

After the steps A5839 and A5841, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a small hit for opening the upper special winning opening (A5842). When it is a small hit to open the special winning opening (the result of A5842 is "Y"), the upper special winning portion fraudulent winning number area is cleared (A5843), and the fraud monitoring period is set in the upper special winning portion fraud monitoring period flag area. The outside flag is saved (A5844), the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing is executed (A5847), and the special figure 2 displaying processing is ended. If it is not a small hit to open the upper special winning opening (the result of A5842 is "N"), that is, if it is a small hit to open the lower special winning opening, the lower special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (A5845). , The fraudulent monitoring period flag outside the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area is saved (A5846), the special figure 2 small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing is executed (A5847), and the special figure 2 displaying processing is ended. ..

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit) (the result of A5827 is “N”), that is, the special figure 2 variable display game. If the result is no, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (A5848). If it is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5848 is “N”), the process moves to step A5856.

When the probability change is high (the result of A5848 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (low probability) as an effect command (A5849) and executes effect command setting processing (A5850). .. Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (A5851), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (A5852). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is in the small hit state (A5853). If the special display 1 variable display game is in the small hit state (result of A5853 is “Y”), the process moves to step A5856.

When the special hitting 1 variable display game is not in the small hit state (the result of A5853 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (A5854). Then, in order to turn off the second game state display portion 56 (lamps D8-D10) for informing that it is right-handed, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5855). , Clearing the change of special map 2 in the special map status area (information subtraction) (A5856). After that, since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, the special figure 2 normal process shift setting process 1 is executed (A5857), and the special figure 2 displaying process is ended. In the special figure 2 normal process shift setting process 1, "0" is set as the process number in order to shift to the special process 2 normal process, and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area.

[Fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the fanfare/inter-interval processing shift setting processing (A5726, A5826) in the special figure 1 displaying process and the special figure 2 displaying process will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal related to the start of a big hit (on data of one big hit signal) in the external information output data area (A5901), and a signal related to the end of high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area. (A5902), the round number area for managing the number of rounds in the RWM is cleared (A5903).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (A5904), and saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A5905). By setting the special figure low probability & no time saving flag, the probability of hitting becomes low and there is no time saving (no time saving). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery (A5906) that saves the command output to the performance control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery, and the high probability fluctuation number is maintained in the RWM. The probability variation frequency area is cleared (A5907).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the big hit information in the special figure status area (A5908), and clears the high-probability final fluctuation flag area holding the high-probability final fluctuation flag in the RWM (A5909). Then, the second game state display unit 56 (lamp D8) for saving the signal (on-data of the launch position designation signal 1) regarding the right-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A5910) and notifying that it is the right-handed time. In order to turn on -D10), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5911).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (A5912), and sets the special figure 2 abnormal number area in which the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is held in the RWM. Clear 0 (A5913), hold special figure 1 number of fluctuations in RWM Clear the special figure 1 number of fluctuations area to 0 (A5914), keep special figure 2 abnormality change notification timer value in RWM Special figure 2 abnormality The fluctuation notification timer area is cleared to 0 (A5915), and the fanfare/inter-interval processing shift setting processing is ended.

[Special figure 1 Small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process shift setting process (A5744) in the special figure 1 displaying process will be described. FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process shift setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets "7" as a process number in order to shift to the small hit fanfare process (A6001a), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A6002a). Subsequently, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6003a), and the signal related to the start of the small hit (on data of one big hit signal) is saved in the external information output data area. (A6004a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal (on-data of the special symbol 1 small hit signal) related to the start of the special figure 1 small hit in the test signal output data area (A6005a), and in the small hit status area. The information is saved (A6006a). Further, the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (A6007a), and the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 Small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process shift setting process (A5847) in the special figure 2 displaying process will be described. FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hitting fanfare medium processing shift setting processing.

Special figure 2 small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing, special figure 1 small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing (Figure 60A) “special drawing 1” (special design 1) “special drawing 2” (special design 2) Since the same processing as the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, steps A6001b-A6007b in the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing respectively correspond to steps A6001b-A6007b in the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing.

[Processing during fanfare/interval]
Next, details of the fanfare/interval processing (A3211, A3314) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare/interval processing.

The game control device 100 first updates the number of rounds in the number-of-rounds area by +1 (A6101). Since the number of rounds is set to 0 in the fanfare/inter-interval processing shift setting processing (A5903), it is 0 before the big hit operation this time. After that, a round command corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared as an effect command (A6102), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6103).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a big hit medium processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds (A6104), and saves it in the big hit medium processing control pointer area of the RWM (A6105). Here, 0 is set as the initial value in the case of a pattern in which opening and closing of the special winning opening is repeated during one round, and in the case of a pattern in which the special winning opening is opened only once in one round, the initial value is suddenly set to the upper limit. Set the value (=21). In the case of a pattern in which opening and closing are repeated, the initial value may be not 0 but a value larger than 0 and less than the upper limit value (that is, starting from an intermediate value). In addition, it is possible to have a pattern in which opening and closing is repeated for one of the upper and lower major winning openings, and the pattern is opened only once for the other. Both the upper and lower large winning openings can be opened and closed. It may be a pattern in which the above is repeated or a pattern in which it is opened once.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the special winning opening opening information and the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds (A6106). Then, "4" is set as the process number in order to shift to the special winning opening opening process (A6107), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (A6108). If it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6108 is "Y"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6109), and the special winning opening time is set to the special figure 1 game processing. Save in the timer area (A6110). Special Figure 1 If the variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A6108 is "N"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6111), and the special winning opening time is set to the special figure 2 game processing timer. Save in the area (A6112).

Next, the game control device 100, based on the special winning opening opening information, determines whether or not it is a big hit to open the upper special winning opening (A6113). When it is a big hit to open the special winning opening (the result of A6113 is "Y"), the special winning opening opening processing transition setting processing 1 is executed (A6114), and the fanfare/interval processing is ended. When it is not a big hit to open the upper special winning opening (the result of A6113 is "N"), that is, when it is a big hit to open the lower special winning opening, the big winning opening opening mid-process transition setting processing 2 is executed (A6115). , Ends fanfare/interval processing. In the present embodiment, there are two types, a big hit that opens only the upper special winning opening and a big hit that opens only the lower large winning opening, but a big hit that opens both the upper special winning opening and the lower large winning opening is provided. A configuration is also possible.

[Transition setting process 1 during the process of opening the special winning opening]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening processing transition setting processing 1 (A6114) in the fanfare/interval processing will be described. FIG. 62A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 1.

The game control device 100 saves a signal related to the opening of the upper special winning opening (ON data of the signal during operation of the special electric auditors product 1) in the test signal output data area (A6201a), and in the special winning opening solenoid output data area of the RWM. The special winning opening on data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 39b is saved (A6202a), the special winning opening count number is cleared (A6203a), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting processing 1 is ended.

[Prize winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 (A6115) in the fanfare/interval process will be described. FIG. 62B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 2.

The game control device 100 saves the signal related to the opening of the lower prize opening (ON data of the signal during operation of the special electric auditors product 2) in the test signal output data area (A6201b) and in the special winning opening solenoid output data area of the RWM. The lower special winning opening ON data for turning on the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved (A6202b), the special winning opening count number is cleared (A6203b), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting processing 1 is ended.

[Processing during opening of the special winning opening]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening process (A3212, A3315) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening process.

The game control device 100 first loads and prepares a big hit mid-process control pointer (A6301), and determines whether or not the value of the loaded big hit mid-process control pointer is greater than or equal to the big hit operation end value (eg, 21). (A6302). When the value of the big hit medium processing control pointer is less than the big hit operation end value (the result of A6302 is "N"), the big hit medium processing control pointer is updated by +1 (A6303), and the processing according to the big hit medium processing control pointer is performed. The operation shift setting process is executed (A6304), and the special winning opening opening process is ended.

If the value of the mid-hit processing control pointer is equal to or greater than the big hit operation end value (result of A6302 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not the current round is the final round (A6305). If the number of rounds (A6101) updated by +1 in the fanfare/interval processing is the final round number (for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R), it can be determined to be the final round.

If it is not the final round (result of A6305 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares an interval command as an effect command (A6306) and executes an effect command setting process (A6308). If it is the final round (result of A6305 is "Y"), the ending command is prepared as a production command (A6307), and production command setting processing is executed (A6308).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (A6309), and sets "5" as the processing number in order to shift to the special winning opening remaining ball processing (A6310). ). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A6311). If the special display 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A6311 is "Y"), this processing number is saved in the special display 1 game processing number area (A6312), and the remaining ball processing time is set to the special display 1 game processing timer. Save in the area (A6313). If it is not a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6311 is "N"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6314), and the remaining ball processing time is set to the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Save to (A6315).

After the steps A6313 and A6315, the game control device 100 turns off both the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b, so the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A6316). The process of opening the special winning opening is ended.

[Big hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit operation transition setting process (A6304) in the process of opening the special winning opening will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit operation shift setting process.

The game control device 100 first performs a branch using the mid-hit processing control pointer (A6401). It is also possible to use the value before the +1 update in step A6303, instead of the current value, for the mid-hit processing control pointer. When the value of the big hit mid-game process control pointer is an even number, a wait time (for example, 1500 msec) corresponding to the big hit mid-game process control pointer is set (A6402), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A6403).

When the value of the processing control pointer during the big hit is odd, the gaming control device 100 sets the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the processing control pointer during the big hit (A6404). For example, the special winning opening opening time is 200 msec when the big hit medium processing control pointer is 1 to 19 (big hit medium processing control pointer=1 to 19), and the big hit medium processing control pointer is 21 (big hit medium processing control pointer=21). In the case of, it is 25000 msec. The special winning opening opening time of 200 msec is used in the case of a pattern in which the special winning opening is repeatedly opened and closed for a short time during one round. Subsequently, the upper special winning opening ON data for turning on the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A6405). As a result, the special winning opening can be repeatedly opened and closed for a short time. If the lower special winning opening repeats opening and closing for a short time, save the lower special winning opening ON data in the special winning opening solenoid output data area, or the lower large winning opening ON data and upper large winning opening ON data. A configuration that saves both data is also possible.

After steps A6403 and A6405, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (A6406). When it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6406 is "Y"), the set time (wait time or special winning opening opening time) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6407). When it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6406 is "N"), that is, when it is the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6408). ).

[Remaining sphere processing of big winning mouth]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing (A3213, A3316) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening remaining ball processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the current round is the final round (A6501). If it is not the final round (the result of A6501 is "N"), the test signal output is the signal related to the end of opening the special winning opening (off data of the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal and off data of the special electric auditors product 2 operating signal). Save in the data area (A6502), set the special winning opening information and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds (A6503), and set "3" as the process number to shift to the fanfare/interval process (A6504). ). As a result, the fanfare/interval processing, the special winning opening opening processing, and the special winning opening remaining ball processing are repeated until the final round. In addition, the interval period between rounds is a period from the end of the round until the special winning opening remaining ball processing time and the interval time elapse.

Game control device 100, when it is the final round (the result of A6501 is "Y"), executes the big hit end process transition setting process for making a transition to the big hit end process (A6505), and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Is set (A6506), and "6" is set as the process number (A6507). Thereby, it is possible to shift to the big hit ending process. The length of the ending period is the sum of the ending time and the special winning opening remaining ball processing time, and the ending effect is executed on the display device 41 or the like during this ending period.

After steps A6504 and A6507, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (A6508). If it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6508 is "Y"), the set process number ("3" or "6") is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (A6509) and set. The saved time (interval time or ending time) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6510), and the special winning hole remaining ball processing is ended.

If the game control device 100 is not the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6508 is “N”), that is, if it is the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, the process number (“3” or “6”). ) Is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6511), the set time (interval time or ending time) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6512), and the special winning hole remaining ball processing is finished. ..

[Big hit end process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit ending process transition setting process (A6505) in the special winning opening remaining ball process will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end process shift setting process.

First, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of opening the special winning opening (off data of the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal and off data of the special electric auditors product 2 operating signal) in the test signal output data area ( A6601), clear the special winning opening count number area that holds the special winning opening count number in the RWM (A6602), and clear the round number area (A6603). Then, the round number upper limit value area is cleared (A6604), the round number upper limit value information area is cleared (A6605), the special winning opening opening information area is cleared (A6606), and the big hit mid-process control pointer area is cleared. (A6607).

[Special map 1 big hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 big hit end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process.

The game control device 100 first sets "0" as a process number to return to the normal process of special figure 1 (A6701), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A6702). Then, save the signal about the end of the big hit (one off data of big hit and off data of three big hit) in the external information output data area (A6703), and signal about the start of high probability & time saving (output from inside big hit). Continuously output two jackpot signals) to the external information output data area (A6704).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A6705). The signal regarding the end of the big hit is, for example, the off data of the condition device operating signal, the off data of the accessory continuous operation device operating signal, the off data of the special symbol per signal. Then, a signal related to the start of high probability and shortening of time is saved in the test signal output data area (A6706). Here, the signal regarding the start of high probability & time saving is, for example, a special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a special symbol 2 high probability state signal, a special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, a special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal. .. After that, the signal related to the right-handing instruction (launching position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6707).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number in the high probability in the game state display number area (A6708), saves the number in the right hitting state in the game state display number 2 area (A6709), and round LED pointer. The off number is saved in the area (A6710). Next, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper special prize mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (A6711), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower special winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (A6712). Clear the area (A6713)

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high-probability flag in the special figure game mode flag area in order to set the high-probability state (probability change state) after the end of the big hit state (A6714). In the present embodiment, the big hit symbol is only a probability variation symbol, and after the big hit ends, it becomes a high probability state and a time saving state. Then, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high probability variation number is saved in the high probability variation number region for holding the high probability variation number (A6715). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 upon power recovery (A6716).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6717), and ends the special figure 1 jackpot end process. This special figure 2 game wait time value delays the determination of fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing) at the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12). Is set to. Here, the special figure 2 game wait time value is 8 msec which is twice the interruption period (that is, 2 as the value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area).

If the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 game process (A1310 of FIG. 12) that is performed immediately after the current special figure 1 game process (A1310 of FIG. 12) in which the special figure 1 big hit ending process is executed. In (A1311) of FIG. 12, the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game has started (started within the timer interrupt processing this time), so that the special figure 2 variable display game is better than the special figure 1 variable display game. It will start first and may be a problem. Note that the special figure 1 game processing timer is not set in the special figure 1 big hit end processing, and therefore remains 0. Therefore, the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed in the next timer interrupt processing (special figure 1 normal processing during the special figure 1 game processing).

The special figure 2 game wait time value is set to a time (8 msec) twice as long as the interrupt cycle, but the special figure 2 game process immediately after the current special figure 1 game process (starts within the current timer interrupt process) This is because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). In the special figure 2 game processing in the next timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game processing timer is further updated by -1 (decreased by 4 msec) and becomes 0 (the result of A3304 is "Y"), and the special figure 2 variable display game. Of the fluctuation start of (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing) is performed. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the big hit state in the special figure 1 variable display game, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start changing (special figure 1 game processing and special figure If the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing simultaneously. As described above, while the special figure 1 variable display game is in the big hit state, the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with a deviating symbol (forced termination or originally unchanged).

After the end of the big hit state, if there is no particular problem in game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game starts earlier than the special figure 1 variable display game, the process of step A6717 is omitted, and FIG. 2 It is not necessary to set the game wait time value.

[Special figure 2 Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 big hit ending process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit ending process.

The game control device 100 first sets "0" as a process number to return to the normal process of special figure 2 (A6801), and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A6802). Then, save the signal related to the end of the big hit (one big hit off data and three big hit off data) to the external information output data area (A6803), and the signal related to the start of high probability & time saving (the big hit output. 2 jackpot signals are continuously output) in the external information output data area (A6804).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A6805). The signal regarding the end of the big hit is, for example, the off data of the condition device operating signal, the off data of the accessory continuous operation device operating signal, and the off data of the special symbol 2 signal. Then, a signal related to the start of high probability and shortening of time is saved in the test signal output data area (A6806). Here, the signal regarding the start of high probability & time saving is, for example, a special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a special symbol 2 high probability state signal, a special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, a special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal. .. After that, the signal (launching position designation signal 1) related to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A6807).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the high probability number in the game state display number area (A6808), saves the right hitting number in the game state display number 2 area (A6809), and round LED pointer. The off number is saved in the area (A6810). Next, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper special winning portion fraud monitoring period flag area (A6811), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower special winning portion fraud monitoring period flag area (A6812). Clear the area (A6813)

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability flag in the special figure game mode flag area in order to set the high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the big hit state (A6814). In the present embodiment, the big hit symbol is only a probability variation symbol, and after the big hit ends, it becomes a high probability state and a time saving state. Then, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high probability variation number is saved in the high probability variation number region for holding the high probability variation number (A6815). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 upon power recovery (A6816).

In addition, in the special figure 2 big hit end processing, it is not necessary to provide the special figure 1 game wait time value. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer and the special figure 2 game processing timer are not set, they remain at 0, and the variation start of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game will start in the next timer interrupt processing. If the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied after the determination (in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process) is performed, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start changing at the same time. This is because it can be done.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (A3215, A3318) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during the small hit fanfare.

First, the game control device 100 performs a branch according to the opening pattern of the special winning opening due to the small hit (special drawing 1 small hit, special drawing 2 small hit 1, 2, 3) (A6901). The opening pattern of the special winning opening by the small hit corresponds to the small hit stop symbol number (A4312a, A4312b) and the small hit symbol (A4313a, A4313b stop symbol pattern).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 1 small hit, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit opening during opening command of the lower special winning opening as an effect command (A6902), and executes the effect command setting process ( A6903). Next, "8" is set as the processing number (A6904), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6905), and the small winning opening time 1 (for example, 48 msec) is set as the opening time of the special winning opening. Saved in the special processing 1 game processing timer area (A6906). Then, the signal related to the start of the small hit operation (ON data of the special electric auditors product 2 in-operation signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6907), and the lower special winning opening on-data is set in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6908).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 1, the game control device 100 prepares the small hit opening opening command of the lower special winning opening opening as an effect command (A6909), and executes the effect command setting process. (A6910). Next, "8" is set as the process number (A6911), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (A6912), and the small winning opening time 2 (for example, 1600 msec) is set as the opening time of the special winning opening. Special Figure 2 Save in the game processing timer area (A6913). Then, the signal (start data of the special electric auditors 2 working signal) related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (A6914), and the lower special winning opening on-data is set in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6915).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 2, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit opening command of the upper special winning opening opening as an effect command (A6916), and executes the effect command setting process. (A6917). Next, "8" is set as the processing number (A6918), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6919), and the small winning opening time 3 (for example, 1200 msec) is set as the opening time of the special winning opening. Special Figure 2 Save in the game processing timer area (A6920). Then, the signal related to the start of the small hit operation (the ON data of the signal during the operation of the special electric accessory 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6921), and the large winning opening solenoid ON data is stored in the large winning opening solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6922).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is special figure 2 small hit 3, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit opening during opening command of the upper special winning opening as an effect command (A6923) and executes an effect command setting process. (A6924). Next, "8" is set as the processing number (A6925), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6926), and the small hit opening time 4 (for example, 1600 msec) is set as the opening time of the special winning opening. Special Figure 2 Save in the game processing timer area (A6927). Then, a signal (start data of the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal) related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (A6928), and the upper special winning opening on-data is stored in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6929).

After the steps A6908, A6915, A6922, and A6929, the game control device 100 clears the special winning opening count area (A6930), and finishes the small hit fanfare medium processing.

As described above, for each type of the small hit stop design number or the small hit opening pattern corresponding to the small hit design (special drawing 1 small hit, special drawing 2 small hit 1, 2, 3), large open by small hit The winning opening (either the upper winning opening or the lower winning opening), the opening time of the winning opening (opening time for small hits), etc. are determined. In the present embodiment, the control pointer is not set and only the small hit opening pattern in which the special winning opening is opened only once is set. However, as in the case of the big hit, the control pointer is set to open and close the special winning opening. There may be a repeating small hit opening pattern. Further, by setting "8" as the processing number, it is possible to shift to the small hit medium processing after the small hit fanfare middle processing is completed.

[Processing during small hits]
Next, the details of the small hit midway processing (A3216, A3319) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process during the small hit.

The game control device 100 first prepares a small hit end screen command as an effect command (A7001) and executes an effect command setting process (A7002). As a result, the effect control device 300 that has received the small hit end screen command can cause the display device 41 to display the small hit end screen.

Next, the game control device 100 performs branching according to the opening pattern of the special winning opening due to the small hit (special drawing 1 small hit, special drawing 2 small hit 1, 2, 3) (A7003).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 1 small hit, the game control device 100 sets "9" as the processing number (A7004) and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A7005). , Small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (for example, 600 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A7006). Then, in order to turn off both the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A7007), and the small hitting medium process is ended.

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 1, the game control device 100 sets "9" as the process number (A7008) and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A7009). ), the small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (for example, 600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7010). Then, in order to turn off both the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A7011), and the small hit medium processing is ended.

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 2 or the special figure 2 small hit 3 the game control device 100 sets "9" as the process number (A7012) and sets it in the special figure 2 game process number area. The processing number is saved (A7013), and the small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (for example, 800 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7014). Then, in order to turn off both the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A7015), and the small hitting medium process is ended.

By setting "9" as the process number, it is possible to shift to the small hit remaining ball process after the end of the small hitting process.

[Small hit remaining ball treatment]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball processing (A3217, A3320) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit remaining ball processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether it is a small hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (A7101). When it is a small hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A7101 is "Y"), "10" is set as the process number (A7102), and this process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area ( A7103), the small hit ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A7104).

When the game control device 100 is not the small hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A7101 is "N"), that is, when it is the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, it sets "10" as the process number. Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A7106), and the small hit ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7107).

After the steps A7104 and A7107, the game control device 100 outputs a signal regarding the end of the small hitting operation (off data of the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal and off data of the special electric auditors product 2 operating signal) as test signal output data. The area is saved (A7108), the special winning opening count area is cleared (A7109), and the small hit remaining ball processing is ended. By setting "10" as the process number, it is possible to shift to the small hit ending process after the small hit remaining ball process is completed.

[Special drawing 1 small hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 small hitting end processing (A3218) in the special figure 1 game processing will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 small hit end processing.

The game control device 100 sets "0" as the process number to return to the normal process of the special figure 1 (A7201), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A7202). Then, save the signal related to the end of the small hit (off data of the special symbol 1 small hit signal) in the test signal output data area (A7203), and save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area Yes (A7204). Further, the turned-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7205), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7206).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning probability is in the high probability state (A7207). If it is in the high probability state (result of A7207 is “Y”), the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7210). When it is not in the high probability state (result of A7207 is “N”), the signal related to left-handed instruction (off data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7208), and is displayed in the game state display number 2 area. The number in the left-handed state is saved (A7209), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7210).

Here, for the same reason as step A6717 of the special figure 1 big hit ending process (FIG. 67), 8 msec (2 as the value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area), which is twice the interrupt period, is The special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the small hit state by the special figure 1 variable display game, the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is determined (special figure 1 game processing and special figure If the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing simultaneously.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 small hitting end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hitting end processing.

The game control device 100 sets "0" as the process number to return to the normal process of the special figure 2 (A7301), and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A7302). Then, save the signal about the end of the small hit (off data of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) in the test signal output data area (A7303), save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area Then (A7304), the flag during fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A7305). Further, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7306), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7307).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning probability is in a high probability state (A7308). If it is in the high probability state (result of A7308 is “Y”), the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. When it is not in the high probability state (result of A7308 is “N”), the signal related to left-handed instruction (off data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7309), and the game state display number 2 area is displayed. The number in the left-handed state is saved (A7310), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended.

For the same reason as the special figure 2 big hit ending process (FIG. 68), it is not necessary to provide a game wait time value in the special figure 2 small hit ending process.

[Design fluctuation control processing]
Next, details of the symbol variation control processing (A3220, A3323) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol variation control process. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2) and setting the display data of the special symbol.

In the game control device 100, the special figure variation control flag related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, special figure 1) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is a changing flag (a flag indicating changing). It is checked whether or not (A7401). If it is changing, the changing flag is saved in the change control flag area (A5205a, A5205b).

Then, as a result of the check, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation control flag is the changing flag (A7402), and if the special figure fluctuation control flag is the changing flag (A7402) The result is "Y"), and the symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the special figure of the control target (for example, special figure 1) is acquired (A7403). The address of the symbol display table (for fluctuation) is defined in the fluctuation control table (A3219, A3322). Further, of the special diagrams 1 and 2, the blinking control timer according to the special diagram to be controlled (for example, special diagram 1) is updated by -1 (A7404), and the value of the timer is 0, that is, the time is up. It is determined whether or not (A7405).

When the value of the blink control timer is not 0 (result of A7405 is "N"), the game control device 100 acquires display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area (A7408). If the value of the blink control timer is 0 (result of A7405 is “Y”), the blink control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the blink control timer area of the control target (A7406). Furthermore, of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the symbol number in change which relates to the special figure of the control object (for example, special figure 1) is updated by +1 and saved in the symbol number area in change of the target (A7407). The display data corresponding to the value of the changing symbol number area is acquired (A7408). After that, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7411), and the symbol variation control process ends.

In this way, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6A, a variable display game in which a non-lighted symbol (changing symbol number=0) and a lighted symbol (changing symbol number=1) are repeated is a special object display to be controlled. Device (special figure 1 display 51 or special figure 2 display 52). The initial value of the changing symbol number is set to 0, which indicates the non-illuminated symbol in FIG. 5 (A5207a, A5207b).

On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not the changing flag (the result of A7402 is “N”), the game control device 100 displays the symbol display table () corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, special figure 1). (For stop) is acquired (A7409). The address of the symbol display table (for stop) is defined in the variation control table (A3219, A3322). Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the target stop symbol area (stop symbol number) is acquired (A7410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7411), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

In this way, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6A, among the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device 51 or special figure 2 display device) to be controlled is displayed. In the device 52), the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number will be displayed. In the stop symbol area, a stop symbol number is saved corresponding to a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (A5324, A5424).

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the segment LED editing process. In the segment LED editing process, the round display unit 53, the special figure 1 hold display unit (memory display unit) 54, the first game state display unit 55, the second game state display unit 56 and the like provided in the collective display device 50 are configured. Settings for driving the segment LED are performed.

The game control device 100 first sets a special figure 1 pending number table in which the display mode on the special figure 1 pending indicator 54 is defined (A7501), and acquires display data corresponding to the special figure 1 pending number. Saved in the segment area of the special display 1 reserved display (A7502).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 53 is defined (A7503), acquires the display data corresponding to the round LED pointer, and sets it in the segment area of the round display unit 53. Save (A7504).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the first game state display section 55 is defined (A7505). Further, the display data corresponding to the game state display number in the game state display number area is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display section 55 (A7506). Thereby, the high probability state or the low probability state can be displayed on the first game state display section 55.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 56 is defined (A7507). Furthermore, the display data corresponding to the game status display number 2 in the game status display number 2 area is acquired and saved in the segment area of the second game status display portion 56 (A7508), and the segment LED editing processing is ended. As a result, it is possible to display on the second gaming state display unit 56 that the time is right-handed or left-handed.

In addition, when the third game state display unit 57 indicating that the variable display game is suspended is provided corresponding to a modification described later, the game control device 100 displays the third game state display unit 57. A game state display table in which modes are defined is set, display data corresponding to whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended is acquired, and the third game state display unit 57 is acquired. May be saved in the segment area of.

[Unauthorized magnet monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the magnet fraud monitoring process. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

In the game control device 100, first, the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is turned on, that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2). It is determined whether or not the magnetism is detected (A7601).

When the magnet sensor is on (the result of A7601 is “Y”), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is detected, the game control device 100 sets the magnet fraud monitoring timer for counting the abnormal magnetism detection period to +1. It is updated (A7602), and it is determined whether the timer has timed out (A7603).

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (the result of A7603 is “Y”), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer ( (A7604), the magnet irregularity notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet irregularity notification timer area (A7605).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet injustice notification command as an effect command (A7606), and prepares a magnet injustice occurrence flag indicating that a magnet injustice has occurred as a magnet injustice flag (A7607). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A7613). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interrupts) set by the magnet fraud monitoring timer, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not on (A7601 result is “N”), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected. Yes (A7608). If the magnet fraud notification timer that defines the magnet fraud notification time is not 0, -1 is updated (A7609). The minimum value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is set to 0.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is 0 (A7610). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (result of A7603 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A7609.

When the value of the magnet injustice notification timer is not 0 (the result of A7610 is “N”), that is, when the time has not expired, the game control device 100 ends the magnet injustice monitoring process.

Further, the game control device 100, when the value of the magnet injustice notification timer is 0 (the result of A7610 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the injustice notification period. When is ended, or when the injustice notification has not been performed from the beginning, a command of magnet injustice notification end is prepared as an effect command (A7611).

Further, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet fraud cancellation flag as a magnet fraud flag (A7612), and determines whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A7613).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of A7613 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process. On the other hand, when the prepared magnet illegal flag does not match the value of the magnet illegal flag area (the result of A7613 is "N"), the prepared magnet illegal flag is saved in the magnet illegal flag area (A7614), and the effect command is set. The processing is executed (A7615). After that, the magnet fraud monitoring process ends.

[Board radio frequency monitoring process]
Next, the details of the board radio frequency irregularity monitoring processing (A1314) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process. In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, presence/absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) of the game board, and the start or end of the illegality notification is set.

In the game control device 100, first, the radio sensor 62 is turned on, that is, from the state of the detection signal output from the radio sensor 62 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2) via the proximity I/F 121. It is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (A7701). When the radio wave sensor is on (the result of A7701 is “Y”), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area ( A7702).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a board radio wave irregularity notification command as an effect command (A7703), and prepares a board radio wave irregularity flag indicating that a board radio wave irregularity has occurred as a board radio wave irregularity flag (A7704). Further, it is determined whether the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag matches the value of the board radio wave irregularity flag area (A7709). That is, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not turned on (the result of A7701 is “N”), that is, when the abnormal radio wave is not detected, the game control device 100 defines the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio fraud notification time. If is not 0, -1 is updated (A7705). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to 0.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is 0 (A7706). When the value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is not 0 (the result of A7706 is "N"), that is, when the time has not expired, the board radio frequency irregularity monitoring process is ended.

Further, when the value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is 0 (the result of A7706 is “Y”), that is, when the game control device 100 has timed up or has already timed up, the period of the irregularity notification. Is completed, or when the injustice notification has not been performed from the beginning, a radio wave injustice notification end command is prepared as an effect command (A7707). Further, a board radio wave irregularity release flag is prepared as a board radio wave irregularity flag (A7708), and it is determined whether or not the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag matches the value of the board radio wave irregularity flag area (A7709).

Then, when the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag matches the value of the board radio wave irregularity flag area (the result of A7709 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the board radio wave irregularity monitoring processing. If the values do not match (the result of A7709 is "N"), the prepared board radio wave flag is saved in the board radio wave flag area (A7710), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7711). After that, the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing is ended.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1315) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, the information based on the monitoring results of the payout command transmitting process (A1305), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (A1308), the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1313), and the board radio fraud monitoring process (A1314). A process of creating information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device or a test shooting test device and setting the information in an output buffer is performed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (A7801). If the glass frame opening error is not occurring (result of A7801 is “N”), it is determined whether a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A7802). When the main frame opening error is not occurring (result of A7802 is "N"), the OFF data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7803), and the OFF data of the security signal is output as the external information output data. Save to area (A7804).

When the glass frame opening error is occurring (result of A7801 is “Y”) or the main frame opening error is occurring (result of A7802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 The ON data of the frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7805), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7806).

After the steps A7804 and A7806, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A7807), and determines whether or not the security signal control timer is 0 (whether or not the time is up). It is determined (A7808). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like (A1026 of the main process). Then, the security signal control timer is clocked from the time of RAM initialization.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (result of A7808 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (A7809). If the security signal control timer is not 0 (result of A7808 is "N"), ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7810), and the process proceeds to step A7811. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

When the frame radio wave irregularity is not occurring (the result of A7809 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (A7811). If frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (result of A7809 is “Y”), ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7810), and the process proceeds to step A7811. When a switch abnormality error is occurring (result of A7811 is “Y”), ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7812), and the process proceeds to step A7813.

When the switch abnormality error is not occurring (result of A7811 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a magnet malfunction is occurring (A7813). It should be noted that it can be determined that a magnet malfunction is occurring when the magnet malfunction flag is saved in the magnet malfunction flag area. When the magnet malfunction is not occurring (the result of A7813 is “N”), it is further determined whether the board radio wave malfunction is occurring (A7814). It should be noted that it can be determined that the board radio wave irregularity is occurring when the board radio wave irregularity flag is saved in the board radio wave irregularity flag area.

When the board radio wave is not occurring (result of A7814 is “N”), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the special winning opening is being generated (A7815). If the fraudulent winning flag relating to the special winning opening (upper special winning opening or lower special winning opening) is saved in the fraud flag area, it can be determined that the special winning opening fraud is occurring. When the special winning opening fraud is not occurring (the result of A7815 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the special figure 2 abnormal variation (abnormal execution state of the special figure 2 variable display game) is occurring ( A7816). When the special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area, it can be determined that the special figure 2 abnormal change is occurring. Toku-zu 2 When abnormal fluctuation is not occurring (result of A7816 is "N"), OFF data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7817).

On the other hand, in the gaming control device 100, when the magnet fraud is occurring (result of A7813 is “Y”), when the board radio fraud is occurring (result of A7814 is “Y”), the special winning opening fraud is If it is occurring (result of A7815 is “Y”), or if the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring (result of A7816 is “Y”), the ON data of the security signal is set in the external information output data area. The data is saved (A7818), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7819). Depending on the setting of on-data of the security signal, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer).

After the steps A7817 and A7819, the game control device 100 starts the opening 1 signal edit process (A7820), starts 2 signals edit process (A7821), main prize ball signal edit process (A7822), symbol determination number signal edit process ( A7823) is executed, and the external information editing process ends. The starting port 1 signal editing process is a process when the starting port 1 switch 36a is input, and the starting port 2 signal editing process is a process when the starting port 2 switch 37a is input.

[Starting port 1 signal editing process]
Next, details of the starting opening 1 signal editing process (A7020) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting port 1 signal editing process.

The game control device 100 first updates -1 if the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (A7901). The minimum value of the start opening 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is 0 (A7902).

When the value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A7902 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not the starting opening 1 signal output frequency is 0 (A7903). ). When the number of times of starting port 1 signal output is not 0 (the result of A7903 is "N"), the number of times of starting port 1 signal output is updated by -1 (A7904), and the starting port 1 signal output control timer area is set to the starting port. The 1-signal output control timer initial value is saved (A7905).

The initial value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is a time (for example, 128 msec) obtained by adding the time of the on state (for example, high level) and the off state (for example, low level) of the starting port 1 signal.

After that, the game control device 100 saves ON data for turning on the starting opening 1 signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A7907), and ends the starting opening 1 signal editing processing.

Further, when the number of times the starting port 1 signal is output is 0 (the result of A7903 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 outputs OFF data for turning off the starting port 1 signal for the external device, outside the RWM. The data is saved in the information output data area (A7908), and the starting port 1 signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A7902 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 determines whether the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is in the output on section. Is determined (A7906). The fact that the start-port 1 signal output control timer is in the output-on section means that the value of the start-port 1 signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

When the start mouth 1 signal output control timer is in the output ON section (result of A7906 is “Y”), the game control device 100 outputs ON data for turning ON the start mouth 1 signal to external information of the RWM. The data is saved in the data area (A7907), and the starting port 1 signal editing process is terminated.

Further, when the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (result of A7906 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 outputs OFF data for turning OFF the starting opening 1 signal for the external device. The data is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A7908), and the starting port 1 signal editing process is terminated.

[Starting port 2 signal editing process]
Next, the starting port 2 signal editing process (A7021) in the external information editing process is merely the replacement of "starting port 1" with "starting port 2" in the starting port 1 signal editing process. The drawings are omitted.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (A7022) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main prize ball signal editing process. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning a prize to a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) to an external device. Processing.

If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, the game control device 100 first updates -1 (A8001). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (A8002).

When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (result of A8002 is “Y”), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0. (A8003).

And when the number of main prize ball signal outputs is not 0 (the result of A8003 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the number of main prize ball signal outputs by -1 (A8004), and outputs the main prize ball signal. The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is saved in the control timer area (A8005). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is a time (for example, 128 msec) obtained by adding the time of the on state (for example, high level) and the off state (for example, low level) of the main prize ball signal.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A8007), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process. When the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (result of A8003 is “Y”), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. Then, (A8008), the main prize ball signal editing process ends.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (result of A8002 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section. Is determined (A8006). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (result of A8006 is “Y”), the game control device 100 outputs ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal to external information of the RWM. Save in the data area (A8007). When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (result of A8006 is “N”), the OFF data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is set as the external information output data of the RWM. The area is saved (A8008), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Design decision frequency signal editing process]
Next, the details of the symbol determination frequency signal editing process (A7023) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol fixed number signal editing process. The symbol determination frequency signal editing process is a process of outputting a symbol determination frequency signal generated when the stop symbol of the variable display game is determined to an external device.

The game control device 100 first updates -1 if the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0 (A8101). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is 0 (A8102).

When the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is 0 (result of A8102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is 0. (A8103).

And the game control device 100, when the number of symbol determination times signal output number is not 0 (the result of A8103 is "N"), the number of symbol determination number signal outputs is updated by -1 (A8104), and the symbol determination number signal output. The control timer saves the symbol confirmation frequency signal output control timer initial value (A8105). The symbol determination frequency signal output control timer initial value is the time obtained by adding the time (for example, 256 msec) in the on state (for example, high level) and the off state (for example, low level) of the symbol determination frequency signal (for example, 300 msec). (For example, 556 msec).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the ON data for turning on the symbol determination frequency signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A8107), and ends the symbol determination frequency signal editing process. When the number of times the symbol determination frequency signal is output is 0 (the result of A8103 is “Y”), the off data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. Then, (A8108), the symbol fixed number signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0 (result of A8102 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is in the output ON section. Is determined (A8106). It is to be noted that the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer being in the output ON section means that the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 300 msec) or more.

When the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is in the output ON section (result of A8106 is “Y”), the game control device 100 outputs ON data for turning on the symbol determination frequency signal to external information of the RWM. The data is saved in the data area (A8107). If the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (result of A8106 is “N”), OFF data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is external information output data of RWM. The image is saved in the area (A8108), and the symbol determination frequency signal editing process is terminated.

[Modification of control of game control device]
Below, the modification of control (processing) of a game control device is demonstrated. The configuration other than that described below is the same as the above-described control (processing) of the game control device.

In the above control processing (FIG. 53, FIG. 54, etc.), while one special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game or special figure 2 variation display game) is changing, the other special figure variation display game When the special figure 2 variable display game or the special figure 1 variable display game has a hit result (a big hit or a small hit), one of the special figure variable display games is forced to end the variation (forced end) with a falling result. However, as in the following modified example, in this case, regarding this one special figure variation display game, measurement of the variation time by the timer is interrupted to derive the game result (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) It is also possible to postpone and to restart the interrupted one of the special figure variation display games after the end of the hitting operation for the other special figure variation display game (after the end of the big hit state or the small hit state).

Even when the special figure variation display game is interrupted, the variation of the special symbol (identification information) is apparently continued on the display device 41 and the special figure variation display section (special figure 1 display device 51 or special figure 2 display device 52). (Note that it is also possible to temporarily stop the fluctuation of the special symbol during the suspension). In the case where the fluctuation is apparently continued, it can be said that, according to another concept, the fluctuation time is extended for one special figure by the time of the hit operation (the time in the big hit state or the small hit state) with respect to the other special figure. ..

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing (Modification)]
A modified example of the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process (A1310) will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game process according to the modification. FIG. 82 shows an addition of the process of step S8200 to FIG. The processing from steps A3201 to A3220 in FIG. 82 has the same contents as in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set (S8200). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is not set (the result of S8200 is "N"), the processing from steps A3201 to A3220 is executed.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (the result of S8200 is "Y"), the game control device 100 does not perform the processing of steps A3201 to A3218, and changes the special figure 1 indicator 51. After preparing the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling (A3219), the symbol fluctuation control process relating to the special figure 1 display 51 is executed (A3220), and the special figure 1 game process is ended. In this way, when the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended, the time measurement (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) for measuring the variable time is stopped. By the symbol variation control process, the variation of the special symbol on the special figure 1 display 51 is apparently continued.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing (Modification)]
A modified example of the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process (A1311) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 game process according to the modification. 83 is obtained by adding the process of step S8300 to FIG. 33. Since the processing from steps A3301 to A3323 in FIG. 83 has the same contents as in FIG. 33, description thereof will be omitted.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted is set (S8300). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set (the result of S8300 is "N"), the processing from steps A3301 to A3323 is executed.

On the other hand, if the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (result of S8300 is "Y"), the game control device 100 does not perform the processing of steps A3301 to A3321 and changes the special figure 2 display 52. After preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling (A3322), the symbol fluctuation control process relating to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A3323), and the special figure 2 game process is ended. In this way, when the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended, the time measurement (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) that measures the variable time is stopped. By the symbol variation control process, the variation of the special symbol itself is apparently continued on the special figure 2 display 52.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation (modification)]
A modified example of the special figure 1 changing process (A3209) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the during-change processing of special figure 1 according to the modification. In FIG. 84, the processes of steps A5311 to A5319 of FIG. 53 are deleted, and the processes of steps S8411 to S8416 are added. The processing of steps A5301 to A5310 and steps A5320 to A5325 of FIG. 84 is the same as that of FIG. 53, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of order (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) and when the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) (A5309) If the result is “N” and the result of A5310 is “Y”), the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted by the processes of steps S8411 to S8416. When the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result fluctuates and stops, the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted.

When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not off and the special figure 2 is changing, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is off (S8411). .. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order (result of S8411 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec (special figure 2 game processing timer=4 msec). A determination is made (S8412). That is, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game may end at the same timing (within the same interrupt process) as the special figure 2 variable display game based on the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game. To do.

When the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec (the result of S8412 is “Y”), the game control device 100 immediately follows the special figure 2 game processing (the current timer interrupt). The special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decreased by 4 msec) to 0 at (starting in the process) and becomes 0, and the special figure 2 variable display game can be ended with a loss result. Therefore, in this case, it is not necessary to interrupt the special figure 2 variable display game, and the process moves to step A5324.

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of order (result of S8411 is “N”), or when the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 msec, the game control device 100 (result of S8412 is “N”). )), a special figure 2 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being suspended is set (S8413). The special figure 2 game interruption flag is used for the determination in step S8300 described above. Then, a decoration special figure 2 interruption command for instructing interruption of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (S8414), and effect command setting processing is executed (S8415). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 interruption command can set the effect for interruption of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure 2 game processing timer by -1 (decreases by 4 msec) (S8416). This is because the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (S8413) and the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) in the special figure 2 game process immediately after the current special figure 1 game process. Instead, the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decreased by 4 msec). As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the special figure 2 game processing timer is excessively increased by 4 msec when the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted (see FIG. 105).

After the step S8416, the game control device 100 executes the processes of steps A5320 to A5325 as in FIG. In addition, in the special figure 1 changing process according to the modified example, unlike the case of FIG. 53, the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2 is not executed.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation (modification)]
A modified example of the special figure 2 changing process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process according to the modification. FIG. 85 is obtained by deleting the processes of steps A5411 to A5419 of FIG. 54 and adding the processes of steps S8511 to S8513. The processing in steps A5401 to A5410 and steps A5420 to A5425 in FIG. 85 has the same contents as in FIG.

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not off (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) and when the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (A5409) If the result is “N” and the result of A5410 is “Y”), the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted by the processes of steps S8511 to S8513. When the special figure 2 variable display game of the hit result fluctuates and stops, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted.

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not off and the special figure 1 is changing, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. It is set (S8511). The special figure 1 game interruption flag is used for the determination in step S8200 described above. Then, a decoration special figure 1 interruption command for instructing interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (S8512), and effect command setting processing is executed (S8513). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 1 interruption command can set the effect for interrupting the decorative special figure 1 variable display game.

After step S8513, the game control device 100 executes the processes of steps A5420 to A5325 as in FIG. In addition, in the special figure 2 changing process according to the modified example, the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 2 is not executed, unlike FIG. 54.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing (modification)]
A modified example of the special figure 1 big hit ending process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 big hit ending process according to the modification. 86 is obtained by adding the processes of steps S8617 to S8621 to FIG. 67. Since the processing from steps A6701 to A6716 in FIG. 86 has the same contents as in FIG. 67, the description thereof will be omitted.

After step A6716, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (S8617). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended (result of S8617 is “N”), clear the special figure 2 game interruption flag area where the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (S8620), The 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8621), and the special figure 1 big hit ending process is ended.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (result of S8617 is “Y”), the game control device 100 directs a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing restart of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. It is prepared as a command (S8618), and effect command setting processing is executed (S8619). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 2 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Then, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (S8620), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8621). , The special figure 1 big hit end processing ends.

By clearing the special figure 2 game interruption flag area, the time measurement (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) for measuring the change time of the special figure 2 variable display game is restarted (the result of S8300 is " N"). That is, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, and the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted is restarted.

The process of step S8621 is the same as the process of step A6717 of FIG. 67, and the special figure 2 game wait time value is the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game after the jackpot state of the special figure 1 variable display game ends (Restart) is set in order to delay the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), which is 8 msec which is twice the interrupt period. As a result, the timer interruption process after the end of the big hit state in the special figure 1 variable display game can restart the special figure 2 variable display game at the same time as the start of the new special figure 1 variable display game. If the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 variable display game will be started (restarted) within the current timer interrupt processing before the special figure 1 variable display game. After the end of the big hit state, if there is no particular problem in game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started (restarted) before the special figure 1 variable display game, the process of step A8621 is omitted. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the special figure 2 game wait time value.

Further, according to the special figure 2 game wait time value, the change start determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is made at the time of the next timer interrupt process, but the decorative special figure 2 restart command is set and transmitted first. This is because the processing cycle of the effect control device 300 is longer than that of the game control device 100, and thus the time for one interrupt (4 msec) can be absorbed.

[Special figure 2 Big hit end processing (modified example)]
A modified example of the special figure 2 big hit ending process (A3317) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit ending process according to the modification. 87 is obtained by adding the processing of steps S8717 to S8720 to FIG. 68. The processing from steps A6801 to A6816 in FIG. 87 has the same contents as in FIG.

After step A6816, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (S8717). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (result of S8717 is “N”), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (S8720), 2 The big hit ending process ends.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (result of S8717 is “Y”), the game control device 100 directs a decorative special figure 1 restart command for instructing restart of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. A command is prepared (S8718), and effect command setting processing is executed (S8719). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 1 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. Then, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (S8720), and the special figure 2 jackpot end process is ended.

By clearing the special figure 1 game interruption flag area, the time measurement (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) for measuring the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is restarted (the result of S8300 is " N"). That is, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, and the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted is restarted.

In addition, the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set in the special figure 2 big hit ending process. This is because both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be started (restarted) within the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) even if there is no special figure 2 game wait time value.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing (modification)]
Next, a modified example of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 small hitting end processing according to the modification. 88 is obtained by adding the processing of steps S8810 to S8814 to FIG. The processing from steps A7201 to A7209 in FIG. 72 has the same contents as in FIG.

The game control device 100 determines whether it is in the high probability state (result of A7207 is “Y”), or after the step A7209, whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (S8810). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended (result of S8810 is “N”), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8813), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 msec) is set to the special figure 2 game. It is saved in the processing timer area (S8814), and the special figure 1 small hit end processing is ended.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (result of S8810 is “Y”), the game control device 100 directs a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing restart of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. It is prepared as a command (S8811), and effect command setting processing is executed (S8812). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 2 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Then, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8813), the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8814), and the special figure 1 small hit end processing is ended. To do. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the small hit state in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game can be restarted at the same time as the start of a new special figure 1 variable display game. The process of step S8814 is similar to step A7210 of FIG. Further, by clearing the special figure 2 game interruption flag area, the special figure 2 variable display game which has been interrupted is restarted.

[Special figure 2 Small hit end processing (modified example)]
Next, a modified example of the special figure 2 small hitting end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hitting end process according to the modification. 89 is obtained by adding the processes of steps S8911 to S8814 to FIG. 73. The processing from steps A7301 to A7210 in FIG. 73 has the same contents as in FIG.

If the game control device 100 is in the high probability state (result of A7308 is “Y”) or after step A7310, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (S8911). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (result of S8911 is "N"), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8914), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (result of S8911 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares the decorative special figure 1 restart command as an effect command (S8912), and executes effect command setting processing. Yes (S8913). The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decoration special figure 2 variable display game. After that, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8914), the special figure 2 small hit end processing ends. By clearing the special figure 1 game interruption flag area, the special figure 1 variable display game that has been interrupted can be restarted.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 according to the effect control program will be described below. For convenience of explanation, the control of the effect control device 300 will be described as corresponding to the above-described modified example of the control of the game control device 100 (the configuration for restarting the interrupted special figure variation display game). In the case of a basic configuration (a configuration that is not a modified example) in which the special figure variation display game is forcibly terminated, the process relating to the interruption and restart of the special figure variation display game may be omitted.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a main process (main program) executed by effect control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the game machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the performance control device 300, the code (number) of the step is represented as “B***”.

When the execution of the main process is started, effect control device 300 first prohibits interruption (B1001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B1002, B1003), and interrupts are permitted (B1004). When the interrupt is permitted, the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is ready to be executed.

Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B1005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B1006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B1007).

Then, effect control device 300 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B1008). The WDT is activated by the CPU initial setting (B1002) described above, and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after the lapse of a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, and changes effect contents (setting) according to the detected signal. Rendering button input processing is executed (B1009). Subsequently, a hall/player setting mode process for accepting an operation such as a change in the brightness of the LED or the liquid crystal or the volume by the player is executed (B1011). Then, the random number update process for updating the random number such as the effect random number is executed (B1011), the received command received from the game control device 100 is analyzed, and the corresponding received command check process is executed (B1012). Details of the received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 91.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect display edit processing of updating various data according to the contents displayed on the display device 41 or the like, or setting a drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. (B1013). The drawing data set at this time can update the image on the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B1014).

Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B1015). If it is not the frame switching timing (result of B1015 is “N”), the process of B1015 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (result of B1015 is “Y”), the display device 41 is displayed. The screen drawing is instructed (B1016). Since the frame cycle of the present embodiment is 1/30 seconds, for example, when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame cycle), the frame switching is performed. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

The effect control device 300 also executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B1017).

The effect control device 300 also executes a decoration control process for controlling the decoration device (the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18) including LEDs or the like (B1018). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling the performance device (board performance device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B1019). In the movable body control process, for example, the solenoid is driven to perform the accessory motion effect.

And production control device 300 will return to the processing of B1008, if the above-mentioned processing of B1019 is completed. After that, the processing from B1008 to B1019 is repeated.

[Reception command check processing]
Details of the received command check process (B1012) in the above-described main process (FIG. 90) will be described below with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the command reception number is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the command reception number is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After the value is subtracted by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer to the command area. Further, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (adds 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31, and here the commands received in the order of index are read and copied to the command area for analysis. It should be noted that at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

Rendering control device 300 determines whether or not the copying of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and when the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N )), the processes of steps B1104 to B1106 are repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the received command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received command is separately analyzed in the command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the analysis command area, the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always allocating a free area in the received command buffer without directly analyzing it, it is possible to prepare for a large number of commands to be received.

Subsequently, when the copying is completed (result of B1106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the command content received in the command area for analysis (B1107), and analyzes the content received command analysis. The processing is executed (B1108) The details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to Fig. 92. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109), after which the processing of step B1101 is performed. It is determined whether or not the analysis of the loaded commands has been completed (B1110). If the analysis has not been completed (result of B1110 is “N”), steps B1107 to B1110 are repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check processing ends.

[Reception command analysis processing]
Next, the details of the received command analysis processing (B1108) in the received command check processing (FIG. 91) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command into the MODE part and the lower byte into the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from the MODE section indicating the type of command. It Therefore, the upper part and the lower part of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE part and the ACTION part.

Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE part indicating the command type (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type). If the MODE part is within the normal range (result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (a concrete effect instruction or the like). If the ACTION part is within the normal range (result of B1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether or not the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the command of the type specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is “Y”), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing of B1205 and thereafter.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE part is within the range of the variable system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a decorative special symbol, and there is a variation command (A5014 and A5015 in FIG. 50). If the MODE part indicates a variable command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

When the MODE part does not represent a variable system command (result of B1205 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the hit system command (B1207). In addition, the hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to effects during a big hit or a small hit, and is, for example, a hit symbol command, a round command, a small hit opening command, or the like. .. When the MODE part indicates a hit command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), hit command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

When the MODE part does not represent the hit command (the result of B1207 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE part is within the range of the symbol command (B1209). There are decorative special figure 1 command (A4316a in FIG. 43A) and decorative special figure 2 command (A4316b in FIG. 43B) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, as the symbol type commands. Then, when the MODE part indicates a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), symbol-based command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the symbol type command (result of B1209 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the one-shot type command (B1211). If the MODE part indicates a single-shot system command (result of B1211 is “Y”), single-shot system command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a one-shot system command (the result of B1211 is “N”), then the MODE part determines whether or not it is within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (B1213). .. The read-ahead symbol system command includes the above-mentioned read-ahead stop symbol command (A3111 in FIG. 31). Then, when the MODE part represents the prefetching symbol type command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the prefetching symbol type command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (the result of B1213 is "N"), then the MODE part determines whether it is in the range of the look-ahead variable system command (B1215). ). The look-ahead variation system command includes the above-mentioned look-ahead variation pattern command (A3115 in FIG. 31). Then, when the MODE part represents the prefetching variable system command (result of B1215 is “Y”), the prefetching variable system command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is ended.

On the other hand, if the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead variation system command (the result of B1215 is “N”), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends. Also, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “N”), the ACTION part is not in the normal range (the result of B1203 is “N”), or when the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( When the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis processing ends.

[Single command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the details of the one-shot system command processing (B1212) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 92) will be described. FIG. 93A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of the one-shot system command processing executed by production control device 300. FIG. 93B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the latter half of the single-shot command processing executed by production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). When the MODE part indicates a model designation command (result of B1301 is “Y”), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE part does not represent the model designation command (result of B1301 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). ). When the MODE part indicates a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “Y”), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and single-shot system command processing is executed. finish.

When the MODE section does not represent the RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE section represents the power failure recovery command. (B1305). If the MODE part indicates a command for power failure recovery (result of B1305 is “Y”), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the single-shot system command processing ends. If the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (if there is a special figure game interruption flag that was backed up in the RWM), the command to restore the power failure is The 1-variation display game is being suspended or the special figure 2 variable display game is being suspended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the customer waiting demo command ( B1307). Then, when the MODE part indicates the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting processing is executed (B1308), and the single shot system command processing is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 hold number command. (B1309). If the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310), and the single-shot system command process is ended.

If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is “N”), then the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. It is determined (B1311). When the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B1312), and the single command system command process is ended.

As described above, in this embodiment, the decoration special figure 2 hold number command is not transmitted from the game control device 100, and thus the processes of steps B1311, B1312 may be omitted. However, when the special figure 2 variable display game is configured not to start immediately even if the special figure 2 starting memory is generated (for example, when the winning to the second starting winning opening 37 is not invalidated during the small hit, In the case), the special figure start information 2 switch process (FIG. 30) also performs the special figure hold information determination process (prefetch process, pre-determination process), and the decorative special figure 2 hold number command from the game control device 100. May be transmitted.

When the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part indicates the probability information command (result of B1313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single-shot system command process is ended.

If the MODE part does not represent the probability information command (result of B1313 is “N”), production control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part represents an error/illegal command ( B1315). Note that, as the error/illegal command, for example, a fraud command (A2108), a fraud cancellation command (A2116), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command (A2414), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command (A2418), a state off There are a command (A2504) and a status on command (A2507). If the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is “Y”), an error/illegal setting process for reporting or canceling the error or fraud is executed (B1316), Terminates single-shot command processing.

When the MODE part does not represent an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is “N”), the production control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part represents a production mode switching command. The determination is made (B1317). When the MODE part indicates a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is “Y”), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single shot system command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the command for mode switching (result of B1317 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part represents a command for stopping the symbol. (B1319). As commands for stopping the symbols, there are a decoration special figure 1 stop command and a decoration special figure 2 stop command. Then, when the MODE part indicates the command for stopping the symbol (result of B1319 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the command is normal (B1320). If it is not a normal command (result of B1320 is “N”), the single-shot system command processing is ended.

When the command is a normal command (result of B1320 is “Y”), effect control device 300 performs stop setting for stopping the corresponding special drawing (decoration special drawing 1 or decoration special drawing 2) (B1321). Then, if all the special symbols (identification information) in the plurality of variable display areas of the display device 41 have stopped, the gaming state flag is set to the normal state (B1322), and the single shot system command processing is ended. In addition, the game state flag is a flag that can indicate other states such as changing, big hit, and small hit.

If the MODE part does not represent the command for stopping the symbol (the result of B1319 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part represents the command for fluctuation interruption. (B1323). The commands for suspending variation are the decoration special figure 1 interruption command (S8512 of FIG. 85) and the decoration special figure 2 interruption command (S8414 of FIG. 84). When the MODE part indicates a command for fluctuation interruption (result of B1323 is "Y"), fluctuation interruption setting processing is executed (B1324), and single-shot system command processing is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the command for fluctuation interruption (the result of B1323 is “N”), next determines whether the MODE part represents a command for fluctuation restart. (B1325). The commands for changing and restarting the variation are the decoration special figure 1 restart command (S8718 in FIG. 87) and the decoration special figure 2 restart command (S8618 in FIG. 86). If the MODE part indicates a command for interruption of fluctuation (result of B1325 is “Y”), fluctuation resumption setting processing is executed (B1326), and single-shot system command processing is ended.

Even if the command for suspending fluctuation is not received, if a hit command related to the effect (big hit or small hit) of the decorative special figure change display game of one of the special figures 1 and 2 is received, The effect control device 300 may automatically determine whether or not the other decorative special figure variation display game is being executed, and perform the variation interruption setting process and the subsequent variation restart setting process.

[Variation interruption setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the details of the variable interruption setting process (B1324) in the single-shot system command process (FIG. 93) described above will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation interruption setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the received command for interruption of fluctuation is a normal command (B1401). If the command is not a normal command (result of B1401 is “N”), the fluctuation interruption setting process ends. If it is a normal command (result of B1401 is “Y”), it is determined whether the command is received at power-on (B1402). When the command is received when the power is turned on (the result of B1402 is “Y”), the decoration special map variable display game is executed corresponding to the received command (decoration special figure 1 interruption command or decoration special figure 2 interruption command). Of the decorative special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) indicating that the process is being suspended is set (B1403).

When the production control device 300 does not receive the command when the power is turned on (the result of B1402 is “N”), the design (decorative special figure 1 or decorative special figure 2) to be interrupted is changing. Whether or not, that is, whether or not the variable display game of the symbols to be interrupted is being executed is determined (B1404). If the target symbol is not changing (result of B1404 is “N”), the change interruption setting process is ended. When the target symbol is changing (result of B1404 is "Y"), it is determined whether the received command for changing interruption is a decoration special figure 1 interruption command (B1405).

When the received command for variation interruption is the decoration special figure 1 interruption command (result of B1405 is “Y”), effect control device 300 sets the variation display for interruption of decoration special figure 1 (B1406). For example, on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, if the variable display of the decorative special figure 1 is displayed large in the center, the variable display for interruption is set to move to the corner and display in a small size. Alternatively, a variable display for interruption, which is displayed in a state of higher transparency than usual, may be set. Subsequently, the interruption flag of the decoration special map 1 which indicates that the decoration special drawing 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set in the RAM or the like (B1407). Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the low probability state (B1408).

When it is in the low probability state (the result of B1408 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the result of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (B1409). If the result of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of B1409 is "N"), the display of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is suggested on the display device 41 or the like. The display setting of the effect for interruption is executed (B1410), and the variable interruption setting process is ended.

When the effect control device 300 is not in the low probability state (the result of B1408 is “N”), that is, in the high probability state, the effect of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41. Therefore, the display setting of the effect for interrupting the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is not performed, and the variable interrupt setting process is ended. When the result of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of B1409 is “Y”), the effect of the big hit of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41. Toku-zu 1 The display setting of the effect for interruption of the variable display game is not performed, and the variable interruption setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the received command for variation interruption is not the decoration special figure 1 interruption command (result of B1405 is “N”), that is, if it is the decoration special figure 2 interruption command, effect control device 300, decoration special figure 2 The variable display for interruption is set (B1411). For example, on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, if the variable display of the decorative special map 2 is largely enlarged (main display, normal display) in the center, it is moved to the corner and reduced in size. The variable display for interruption may be set, or the variable display for interruption displayed in a state of higher transparency than usual may be set. Then, the interruption flag of the decoration special map 2 which shows that the decoration special map 2 variable display game is being interrupted is set to RAM etc. (B1412). Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the low probability state (B1413).

When the production control device 300 is not in the low probability state (the result of B1413 is “N”), that is, in the high probability state, it is determined whether or not the result of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (B1414). ). If the result of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of B1414 is “N”), the display of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is indicated on the display device 41 or the like to suggest the interruption. Display setting of the effect for interruption is executed (B1415), and the variable interruption setting process is ended.

When the probability control device 300 is in the low probability state (the result of B1413 is “Y”), the effect of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41, and therefore the decorative special figure 2 changes. The variable interruption setting process is ended without performing the display setting of the effect for interruption of the display game. When the result of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of B1414 is “Y”), the effect of the big effect of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41. Toku-zu 2 The display setting of the effect for interruption of the variable display game is not performed, and the variable interruption setting process ends.

[Variation restart setting processing]
Details of the fluctuation restart setting process (B1326) in the above-described single-shot system command process (FIG. 93) will be described below with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation restart setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, production control device 300 determines whether the received command for restarting fluctuation is a normal command (B1501). If it is not a normal command (result of B1501 is “N”), the variable restart setting process is ended. When it is a normal command (result of B1501 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the received command for variable restart is a decorative special figure 1 restart command (B1502).

When the received command for resuming variation is the decoration special figure 1 restart command (result of B1502 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 changes the decoration special figure 1 based on the interruption flag of the decoration special figure 1. It is determined whether or not the display game is suspended (B1503). If the decoration display 1 variation display game is not suspended (result of B1503 is “N”), the variation restart setting process is terminated.

When the decoration special map 1 variable display game is being interrupted (result of B1503 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 clears the interruption flag of the decoration special drawing 1 (B1504). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B1505). The power failure recovery display is a display that indicates that the power failure has been recovered and that processing is being performed after the power failure is recovered. When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B1505 is "Y"), the change restart of the decorative special map 1 for recovery according to the probability state (restart of the decorative special map 1 variable display game for recovery) is set. (B1506). When the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (result of B1505 is "N"), restart (not for recovery) of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game according to the probability state is set (B1507).

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the received command for restarting the variation is not the decoration special figure 1 restart command (result of B1502 is “N”), that is, when it is the decoration special figure 2 restart command, the decoration special figure 2 It is determined whether the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted based on the interruption flag of (B1508). If the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended (result of B1508 is “N”), the variable restart setting process ends.

When the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (result of B1508 is “Y”), effect control device 300 clears the interruption flag of decoration special figure 2 (B1509). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B1510). When the power outage restoration display is being displayed (the result of B1510 is “Y”), the variation restart of the decorative special figure 2 for restoration according to the probability state (restart of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game for restoration) is set. (B1511). When the power outage recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B1510 is “N”), the restart (not for recovery) of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game according to the probability state is set (B1512).

Regarding the processing of steps B1506, B1507, B1511, and B1512, the probability state may change between when the interruption of the decorative special figure variation display game is started and when it is restarted. Therefore, when resuming, the display mode of the symbol differs depending on whether or not there is a probability state that the target symbol is preferentially displayed. For example, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted during a low probability, the reduced pattern of the special figure 1 is interrupted in a state where the fluctuation continues in the corner of the display device 41. Is restarted in a state in which is displayed with a large priority in the center of the display device 41. If there is a high probability/shortening time when restarting, restart with the reduced design (reduced display).

[Read-ahead command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, details of the prefetching symbol type command processing (B1214) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 92) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead symbol system command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest pending information is information of special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 starting memory), for example, the latest received special special figure hold number command is the decoration special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether the command is a command (B1601). If the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold information (the result of B1601 is “Y”), the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is placed in the special figure 1 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. It is saved (B1602).

If the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is “N”), the effect control device 300 receives the latest decoration special figure hold number command as the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the decoration special figure 2 hold number command is not transmitted from the game control device 100, the process of step B1603 is basically not executed. However, when the special figure 2 variable display game is configured not to start immediately even if the special figure 2 starting memory is generated (for example, when the winning to the second starting winning opening 37 is not invalidated during the small hit, In this case, the game control device 100 may transmit a decoration special figure 2 hold number command, and the process of step B1603 may be executed.

Rendering control device 300, after steps B1602 and B1603, sets a readahead variable system command reception wait flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a readahead variable system command (B1604). This is because the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variable system command are set, so that the pre-reading variable system command is transmitted from the game control device 100 following the pre-reading symbol system command. After that, the prefetching symbol type command processing is ended.

[Prefetch variable system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the details of the prefetching variable system command process (B1215) in the above-described received command analysis process (FIG. 92) will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the prefetching variable system command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a prefetching variable system command (B1701). When the read-ahead variable system command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable system command is waiting to be received. If the prefetch variable system command is not waiting (the result of B1701 is “N”), the prefetch variable system command processing is ended. If the prefetch variable system command is waiting to be received (result of B1701 is “Y”), the prefetch variable system command reception wait flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the production control device 300 (sub-board) sets the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holdings of the design (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the latest pending information (B1703), and the pre-reading variation system command An intra-sub-readahead variation command MODE part is acquired corresponding to the MODE part (B1704). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the sub-prefetch variation command ACT section corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the look-ahead variation system command is acquired (B1706).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not both of the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the intra-sub prefetch change command MODE part and ACT part) are other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. If both the converted MODE part and ACT part are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command composed of the converted MODE part and ACT part corresponds to the latest hold information and the hold number. It is saved in the pre-reading variable command area (special figure 1 pre-reading variable command area or special figure 2 pre-reading variable command area) (B1708). Then, the prefetch command consistency check process is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (B1710).

Note that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is started when the variable display game is started. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, the first half change becomes longer, and if a new hold occurs and the number of hold is large, the first half change becomes shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first-half variation is changed, the MODE part of the received prefetching variation type command is converted into the sub-internal prefetching variation command MODE section so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be treated the same.

Further, since the type of reach does not relate to the number of holdings, the latter half fluctuation corresponding to the in-sub prefetch change command ACT unit does not depend on the number of holdings. However, since there are different types of reach in the same system, if the production control device 300 is used as it is without converting the ACT part (value of the latter half variation) of the look-ahead variation system command, the number becomes large and the check becomes difficult. .. For example, in normal reach, there are types such as normal reach-1 stop deviation and normal reach+1 stop deviation. Therefore, by converting the ACT units showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-prefetch variable command ACT units, the number is reduced and the load of the check process such as the prefetch command consistency check process is reduced.

Next, the production control device 300 determines that at least one of the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the sub prefetch change command MODE part and ACT part) is 0 (the result of B1707 is “N”), or If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (the result of B1710 is “N”), it is determined that the command after conversion is abnormal, and the prefetch variable system command processing is ended.

When the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (result of B1710 is “Y”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the latest hold newly generated is a failure (B1711). .. When the latest hold is a win (result of B1711 is “N”), effect control device 300 calculates the total time until the latest hold special figure variation display game ends variable (B1712). The total time also includes the stop symbol display time.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the other decorative special figure variation display game will be interrupted when the variation of the latest pending special figure variation display game ends (B1713). If the latest hold is the special figure 1 hold, the other decorative special figure variable display game is the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Here, for example, after the calculated total time, if the other decorative special figure variable display game is not running, or if the other decorative special figure variable display game is out of sync, the other decorative special figure variable display game is It is determined not to suspend.

When the other decorative special figure variation display game is to be interrupted (result of B1713 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is a prefetch effect execution plan for suspension suspension (B1714). The suspension hold is a suspension corresponding to the decorative special figure variation display game to be suspended. In addition, being scheduled to be executed includes that the prefetching effect is being executed. When there is a plan to execute the prefetch effect for the suspension hold (the result of B1714 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the prefetch effect for the suspension hold is a notice of pending change (B1715).

When the pre-reading effect of suspension pending is not a pending change notice (result of B1715 is "N"), the performance control device 300 determines whether the production replacement for the pre-reading effect of suspension pending is in time (B1716). When it is impossible to forcibly terminate the prefetching effect after it has already progressed, it is determined that the effect replacement will not be in time (the replacement is not performed). When the effect replacement is in time (the result of B1716 is “Y”), the converted command is saved in the prefetching variable command area corresponding to the latest hold information and the hold number so that the effect is replaced (B1717).

Production control device 300, if the latest hold is out of place (result of B1711 is “Y”), if it is not to interrupt the other decorative special figure variation display game (result of B1713 is “N”), suspend hold If there is no plan to execute the pre-reading effect for (No in B1714), if the pre-reading effect of suspension and suspension is a notice of pending change (the result in B1715 is "Y"), if the replacement of production is not in time (B1716). If the result is "N"), the effect is not replaced, and the process directly proceeds to step B1718.

Next, the effect control device 300 loads the pre-read target hold information (latest hold information) from the pre-read variable command area (B1718) and executes the pre-reading lottery process regarding the pre-read effect of the latest hold (B1719). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest read-ahead notice effect is generated (B1720). When the latest read-ahead notice effect is generated (the result of B1720 is "Y"), it is determined whether the generated look-ahead notice effect is an effect to start immediately (B1721). The production that starts immediately includes, for example, a notice of pending change. When the pre-reading notice effect that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1721 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1722). Then, the prefetching variable system command processing is ended.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 does not generate the latest pending look-ahead notice effect (the result of B1720 is “N”), or when the generated look-ahead notice effect is not the effect that starts immediately (the result of B1721 is “N”). ), as it is. The prefetching variable system command processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the special figure holding information determination process (prefetching process, pre-determination process) is not performed in the special figure starting port 2 switch processing, the special figure 2 starting storage (special figure 2 holding). On the other hand, the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop symbol command) and the pre-reading variation system command (pre-reading variation pattern command) are not transmitted from the game control device 100. Therefore, the processes of steps B1715 to B1717 are basically not executed. However, when the special figure 2 variable display game is configured not to start immediately even if the special figure 2 starting memory is generated (for example, when the winning to the second starting winning opening 37 is not invalidated during the small hit, In the case), the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variable system command for the special figure 2 starting memory (special figure 2 hold) are transmitted from the game control device 100, and the processing of steps B1711 to B1717 may be executed. Good.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 92) described above will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 sets the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the received symbol system command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special map type is special map 1 or special map 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT part) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as a RAM (B1802). Here, in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes, the symbol type is set using the table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type is the above-mentioned outlier symbol, 2R probability variation symbol, 4R probability variation symbol, 8R probability variation symbol, 16R probability variation symbol.

[Variable command processing]
Details of the variable system command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 92) described above will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable system command processing executed by effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variation system command (variation command) is undetermined (B1901). When the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable system command processing ends. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable system command and the symbol system command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable system command and the symbol type are inconsistent or not. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means that there is a contradiction in performing an effect, such as a case where a deviating variation type command is received but a probability variation pattern symbol command is received. When the variable type command and the symbol type are not consistent (the result of B1903 is “Y”), the variable type command processing is ended.

When the variation type command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is “N”), the production control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation type command (variation command) (B1904), and changes the production. The variable effect setting process to be set is executed (B1905). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Then, the special state is being changed in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of prefetching effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the above-described variation system command process (FIG. 99) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is a variation without reach (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the variation pattern type is variation without reach (the result of B2001 is “Y”), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, and effect mode is set (B2002), and the variation system command ( The MODE section of the (variable command) and the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of the special map type are acquired (B2003). In the case of the fluctuation without reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of reservations is large, and therefore the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is acquired.

If the variation pattern type is not the variation without reach (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, if the variation is with reach, the effect control device 300 corresponds to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type. The notice distribution group address table is set (B2004), and the MODE part of the variation system command (variation command) and the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the variation pattern type are acquired (B2005).

After the steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 performs the lottery of the notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before the reach) (B2006). Then, set the latter half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type (B2007), and set the address of the latter notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT part of the variable system command. It is acquired (B2008), and a preliminary lottery that appears during the latter half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). After that, the contents of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation system command (variation command) are determined (B2010). It should be noted that the variation time command and main reach contents can be known from the variation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (advance effect) corresponding to the result of the advance notice lottery (B2011). After that, the stop design of the decorative special figure variable display game is determined according to the contents of the variation effect such as the reach effect and the notice effect (B2012). Here, the decorative stop design is specifically determined, such as determining the blemishes in the case of the outlying design.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B2013). If the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (result of B2013 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B2015. When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B2013 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the change this time is related to the symbol that is the main display (B2014). The variation this time is a decorative special figure variation display game executed by the variation system command this time. For example, when the variable display of the decorative special figure 1 is largely enlarged (normal display) in the center of the display device 41, the special figure 1 is the main display.

When the current fluctuation is related to the symbol that is the main display (the result of B2014 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs the display setting of the variable effect (B2015) and the display setting of the notice effect. (B2016). Then, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is set (B2017), and the voice number that determines the effect mode of the speaker and the decoration number that determines the effect operation of the decoration device are set (B2018).

Next, the production control device 300 performs the display setting of the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B2019), and the fourth special symbol other than the above-mentioned first to third special symbols varying on the display device 41. When there is (4th symbol), the display setting of the 4th symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (B2020). The fourth symbol variation may be displayed by an LED other than the display device 41.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B2013 is “Y”), and when the change this time is not related to the symbol that is the main display (the result of B2014 is “ N”), that is, when the current fluctuation is a fluctuation during power failure recovery display and is related to the design reduced in the corner of the display device 41, a fluctuating effect or a notice effect so as not to perform a flashy effect. The display setting of the decorative special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type is performed (B2019) without performing the setting (B2015 to B2018).

[Modification of control of production control device]
A modified example of the control (processing) of the effect control device will be described below. The configuration other than that described below is the same as the above-described control (processing) of the effect control device.

[Variation interruption setting process (modified example)]
A modified example of the fluctuation interruption setting process (B1324) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation interruption setting process according to the modification. 101 is obtained by deleting the processes of steps B1402, B1403, B1410 and B1415 from FIG. 94 and adding the processes of steps T2115, T2116, T2117 and T2118. In FIG. 101, the same steps as those in FIG. 94 are designated by the same step numbers (reference numerals), and description thereof will be omitted.

The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 interruption command is in the low probability state (the result of B1408 is “Y”) and the result of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of B1409 is "N"), and the freezing display setting of the changing effect of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is set (T2115). The fluctuating effect includes the fluctuating effect and the notice effect described above. Freeze includes, for example, freeze (stop) of a movie (moving image). Here, you may also make display settings for a series of movies until freeze. Subsequently, the display setting of the superimposed image (movie display of characters etc.) for the freeze effect displayed on the display device 41 is performed (T2116).

When the effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 interruption command is not in the low-probability state (the result of B1413 is “N”) and the result of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (B1414: If the result is "N"), the free display setting of the effect during change of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is set (T2117). The fluctuating effect includes the fluctuating effect and the notice effect described above. Freeze includes, for example, freeze (stop) of a movie (moving image). Here, you may also make display settings for a series of movies until freeze. Then, display setting of the superimposed image for freeze effect displayed on the display device 41 is performed (T2118).

In the above, the freezing effect is performed after receiving the decorative special figure suspending command, but the effect is performed based on the prefetch command before the decorative special figure suspending command is received, and the decorative special figure suspending command is received. At the same time, you may enhance the interest by creating a freezing effect.

[Variation restart setting processing (modified example)]
A modified example of the variation restart setting process (B1326) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation restart setting process according to the modification. FIG. 102 includes the processing of steps T2210-T2215 and T2216-T2221 instead of the processing of steps B1505-B1507 and B1510-B1512 of FIG. In FIG. 102, the same steps as those in FIG. 95 are given the same step numbers (reference numerals), and description thereof will be omitted.

After step B1504, effect control device 300 sets the change restart of decoration special map 1 (restart of the decoration special drawing 1 variable display game) according to the probability state (T2210). Then, it is determined whether the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (T2211). When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of T2211 is “Y”), the change restart of the decoration special map 1 (restart of the decoration special drawing 1 change display game) in the reduced design (reduction display) is set (T2212). ).

When the effect control device 300 receives the decoration special figure 1 restart command, when the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of T2211 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the remaining variation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time ( T2213). When the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (result of T2213 is “Y”), the rewinding effect display setting and the reproduction speed are set (T2214), and the fluctuation resumption setting process ends. In the rewinding effect, the effect before the interruption of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is performed again on the display device 41 at a high reproduction speed. When the remaining fluctuation time is less than the predetermined time (the result of T2213 is “N”), the time for the rewinding effect is insufficient, so that the restart effect display using the electric auditors product and the accessory driving are set (T2215). ), and ends the fluctuation restart setting process.

In addition, after step B1509, the decoration special figure 2 restart command effect control device 300 sets the change restart of the decoration special figure 2 (restart of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game) according to the probability state (T2216). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (T2217). When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of T2217 is "Y"), the fluctuation restart of the decoration special drawing 2 (restart of the decoration special drawing 2 variable display game) in the reduced design (reduced display) is set (T2218). ).

When the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (result of T2217 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (T2219). When the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (result of T2219 is “Y”), the rewinding effect display setting and the reproduction speed are set (T2220), and the fluctuation resumption setting process ends. In the rewinding effect, the effect before the interruption of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is performed again on the display device 41 at a high reproduction speed. When the remaining fluctuation time is less than the predetermined time (the result of T2219 is “N”), the time for the rewind effect is insufficient, so that the restart effect display using the electric auditors and the accessory driving are set (T2221). ), and ends the fluctuation restart setting process.

[Operation and effect of the first embodiment]
Hereinafter, with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 103 to 110, the operation and effect of the present embodiment (including modified examples) will be described. 103 to 110, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are abbreviated as the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game, respectively.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed on the display device based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the result mode of the variable display game is provided. When is a predetermined result mode (a small-hit result mode and a big-hit result mode), it is possible to generate a predetermined game state (a small-hit state, a big-hit state) capable of giving a game value to the player.

The special figure 1 game process as the first control means executes the special figure 1 variable display game (first variable display game) based on the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting winning opening 36). Take control. The special figure 2 game process as the second control means executes the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) based on the establishment of the second start condition (eg, winning in the second start winning opening 37). Take control.

The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can both be in a running state (running state). Then, when one of the special display 1 variable display games and the special figure 2 variable display games has a winning result mode (predetermined result mode), the other variable display game is terminated and the other variation is displayed. The display game may be set as a result mode (FIGS. 53, 54, 56A, and 56B). As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game become the hit result mode. If both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game stop in the hit result mode, the gaming machine 10 hits one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. Since it can only be executed, a problem occurs.

As in the time chart of FIG. 103, a process (FIG. 53, FIG. 54, FIG. 55A, FIG. 55B) of stopping the variable display of one variable display game in the hit result mode (small hit result mode in FIG. 103) is executed. At this time, a process of forcibly ending the variable display of the other variable display game in the result mode can be executed (FIG. 53, FIG. 54, FIG. 56A, FIG. 56B). This allows the other variable display game to continue as long as possible. In addition, a new variable display game of the other is not started until a predetermined game state (small hit state, big hit state) that occurs when one of the variable display games is in the hit result mode is finished (see special FIG. 1 in FIG. 35). Normal processing, special figure 2 normal processing in FIG. 36). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a problem that both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game become the hit result mode.

Further, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 104, when one of the variable display games has a hit result mode (small hit result mode in FIG. 104), the execution time (fluctuation time) of the other variable display game is timed (measured). The other variable display game may be interrupted by stopping the update of the special figure game processing timer (time measuring means) (see FIGS. 82, 83, 84, and 85). When the predetermined game state that occurs when one of the variable display games becomes the hit result mode ends, the other variable display game can be restarted by restarting the update of the special figure game processing timer (time measuring means) (FIG. 82). 83, modified examples of FIGS. 86 to 89). As in the shaded area in FIG. 104, the other variable display game after resumption can be executed by the remaining variable time after the interruption (remaining time of the timer).

In addition, since the other variable display game can be restarted even if interrupted, unlike the case where the other variable display game is forcibly stopped in the result mode, when the other variable display game has a hit result, the other variable display game is restarted after the restart. It is possible to generate a predetermined game state (small hit state, big hit state) by the display game, and it is possible to prevent a problem that the profit of the player is impaired. For example, if one of the variable display games derives the small hit result mode while the other variable display game that is the big hit result mode is being executed, the other variable display game is interrupted, but the small hit game by the one variable display game. When the state ends, the other variable display game can be restarted to derive the jackpot result mode.

Further, since the process of suspending the variable display of the other variable display game is executed when the process of stopping the variable display of one of the variable display games is executed in the result mode, the process of suspending the variable display of the other variable display game is executed as much as possible. Can continue. During the suspension of the other variable display game, if the identification information of the other variable display game is variably displayed, the apparent variation can be continued, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

The game control program (game control program) stored in the storage means (ROM 111b) of the game control means (game control device 100) includes main processing and timer interrupt processing for the main processing. Note that the present embodiment can be applied to other interrupt processing instead of the timer interrupt processing. In the same timer interrupt processing, the special figure 1 game processing (first control means, first control processing) is prioritized over the special figure 2 game processing (second control means, second control processing), and the special figure 1 game After the processing, the special figure 2 game processing is executed.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 105(a), when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a hit result mode and the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 2 game process (FIG. 83) is executed. Since the game processing timer cannot be updated, the special figure 2 game processing timer (time measuring means) for measuring the execution time of the special figure 2 variable display game is updated only for the time of one interruption cycle (4 msec) (step A8416 in FIG. 84). ). As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the special figure 2 variable display game after the restart of the fluctuation is additionally executed for the time corresponding to one interruption cycle. As shown in the time chart of FIG. 105(b), when the timer is not updated, the interrupt period is 1 for the entire variable time (t1 before the interruption+t2 after the interruption) when the timer is updated. The total fluctuation time increases by the time (4 msec) of the batch. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a hit result mode and the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, it is not necessary to update the timer for measuring the execution time of the special figure 1 variable display game.

As in the time chart of FIG. 106(a), the predetermined game state (small hit game state in FIG. 106) that occurs when the special figure 2 variable display game is in the hit result mode (small hit result mode in FIG. 106) is When ending, the restart of the special figure 1 variable display game is not delayed by the delay timer (delay means) for a predetermined time (wait time) (FIG. 87, FIG. 89). On the other hand, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 106(b), when the predetermined game state that occurs when the special figure 1 variable display game is in the hit result mode ends, the special timer 2 variable display game is restarted with a delay timer ( The delay means delays a predetermined time (wait time of 8 msec) (S8621 of FIG. 86, S8814 of FIG. 88). By setting the delay timer, it is possible to restart the special figure 2 variable display game at the same time as the start of a new special figure 1 variable display game by the timer interrupt processing after the hit state in the special figure 1 variable display game.

Further, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 107(a), the special figure 2 variable display game is not affected by the variable display state of the special figure 2 variable display game (stop state, apparent fluctuating state during interruption, etc.). A delay timer (wait time of 8 msec) may be set. As a result, in the timer interrupt process for executing the ending process of the predetermined game state (the hit ending process of FIGS. 67, 72, 86, and 88) that occurs when the special figure 1 variable display game is in the hit result mode, The special figure 2 variable display game by the special figure 2 game processing cannot be started (FIGS. 33 and 83). If the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied in the timer interrupt process after the ending process of the predetermined game state, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process are executed. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be started at the same time. Incidentally, at the timing of the ending process of the predetermined game state, if there is already a special figure 1 start memory and a special figure 2 start memory (in the case of a configuration for storing the special figure 2 start memory), or the first start at this timing. When there is a winning in the winning opening 36 and a winning in the second starting winning opening 37, the first starting condition and the second starting condition are satisfied.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 107(b), when the special figure 2 variable display game is in the hit result mode, the timer interrupt process after the ending process of the predetermined game state is performed without setting the delay timer. If the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously started by the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process. it can.

Furthermore, when one of the variable display games of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped in a hit result mode, the remaining of the other variable display game is left with respect to the other variable display game. A process corresponding to the variable time (value of the special figure game processing timer) may be performed (S8412 in FIG. 84). In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game end at the same timing, and the winning result is derived at the same time.

For example, based on the remaining variation time of the other variable display game, the other variable display game may end at the same timing (within the same interrupt process) as the one variable display game that stops in the hit result mode. It is determined whether or not (S8412 in FIG. 84). Specifically, in the special figure 2 game process executed after the special figure 1 game process of stopping the special figure 1 variable display game in a hit result mode, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game may be zero. It is determined whether or not (the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec in the special figure 1 changing process).

In the case where the special figure 2 variable display game may end at the same timing (within the same interrupt processing) as the special figure 1 variable display game stops in the hit result mode, the special figure 2 variable display game If the result mode is a hit result mode, the special figure 1 variable processing game is interrupted in the special figure 1 game process (special figure 1 changing process of FIG. 84) to suspend the variable display. If the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game is the off result mode, the special figure 2 variable display game is in the off result mode in the special figure 2 game process (particularly during the special figure 2 changing process of FIG. 85). Perform processing to stop.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 108(a), the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted in a situation where both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may bring out the hit results substantially at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to perform an interruption process to postpone the stop of the variable display. Then, the derivation of the hit result of the special figure 1 variable display game is prioritized, and the hit state (hit operation) by the special figure 1 variable display game starts first. After the end of the hit state by the special figure 1 variable display game, the hit result of the special figure 2 variable display game is derived (the apparent change display during suspension is stopped), and the hit state by the special figure 2 variable display game (win (Operation) is started, so that no disadvantage is given to the player. In addition, during the hit state (hit action) by the special figure 2 variable display game, even if there is special figure 1 start memory (special figure 1 hold), the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started (the result of A3501 in FIG. 35). Is "N").

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 108(b), the special figure 2 variable display game ends at the same timing (within the same interrupt process) as the special figure 1 variable display game that derives the hit result (small hit). In a case where there is a possibility, if the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game is the outlier result mode, the processing of stopping the special figure 2 variable display game as it is in the outlier result mode is performed. Even if this out-of-position result mode is derived as it is, no problem occurs. When the process of stopping the special display 2 variable display game in the outlier result mode is performed, the stop display time of the outlier result mode (the time from the stop until the determination of the outlier result) is calculated as the hit result of the special figure 1 variable display game. By setting the same as the stop display time of the mode (the time from the stop to the determination of the hit result (start of fanfare)), the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Further, as shown in the time charts of FIGS. 109 and 110, when the game control device 100 (game control means) recovers from a power failure (power on) while a power failure occurs while the other variable display game is interrupted, a power failure occurs. After the recovery (at the time of recovery or after the recovery), before execution control of one of the variable display games is started, an interrupting command (interrupting command) indicating that the other variable display game is interrupted is produced. It may be transmitted to 300 (production control means) (A1022 in FIG. 9B, B1305 in FIG. 93A). The effect control device 300 can recognize that the other variable display game is being interrupted and the one variable display game is in a hit state (hit operation) by the interruption command, and with regard to the decoration special figure of one of the variable display games. Corresponding processing such as processing for displaying the winning symbol on the display device 41 (see the restoration screen display 1 in FIGS. 109 and 110) can be performed.

When the power failure is restored, the performance control device 300 may display a recovery screen (power failure recovery display) on the display device 41, which suggests the recovery of the power failure. When the decorative special figure variation display game displayed in the main display (first display) is interrupted, a command related to the control of the interrupted decorative special figure variation display game after the power is restored. The recovery screen may be terminated when (command) is received. The commands relating to the control of the decorative special figure variation display game include, for example, a variation command regarding the start of the decorative special figure variation display game (see FIG. 109) and a decoration special figure stop command regarding the stop of the decorative special figure variation display game (see FIG. 110)). When the command (command) related to the control of the decorative special figure variable display game on the side (reduced display side, second display side) displayed in a size different from the main display is received, the recovery screen is not terminated.

With the decorative special figure stop command, when returning to the normal screen after the end of the recovery screen, the disengagement stop pattern may be the default random pattern. In the case of a hit stop design, a default hit design according to the game value (number of rounds, etc.) of the hit state may be used. The background of the normal screen may correspond to the probability state or the like.

There is a possibility that the command related to the control of the decorative special figure variable display game on the side not on the main display (the reduced display side) may be received before the command related to the control of the decorative special figure variable display game of the main display is received. However, if the recovery screen is terminated at that time, a problem may occur. For example, even if the probability is low, the player may be in the probability change state (time saving state) if the recovery screen is ended and the normal screen is displayed at the start of the decorative special figure variation display game that is being reduced. There is a risk of misidentification. Therefore, even if a command related to a new variation start of the ornament special figure variation display game (here, the ornament special figure 2) being reduced and displayed, as in the recovery screen display 2 of FIGS. 109 and 110, is simply changed. Only start display, do not end recovery screen.

The starting storage means (for example, the game control device 100) stores the execution right of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game as the start memory based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition. It is possible. The start memory display control means (for example, the segment LED editing process in FIG. 75 and the main process in FIG. 90) determines the number of start memories stored in the start memory means in a predetermined start memory display area of the display device or the display. It is possible to inform the player by displaying on. Then, the effect control device 300 normally indicates the number of starting memories and the variable display of the variable display game restarted after the interruption in the recovery screen after the recovery on the display device 41 (when the recovery screen is not displayed). It may be displayed in a state of higher transparency. In addition, when the apparent variable display is continued even during the interruption, the variable display continued during the interruption may be displayed in a highly transparent state. In the recovery screen, the fluctuation display displayed on the main display may be shake fluctuation.

[Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the same embodiment (configuration) as the first embodiment can be applied.

[Game board]
FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 111, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to shoot a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails and the like are arranged as members for converting the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40, which forms a window serving as a display area of the variable display game, is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information.

In the center case 40, an inlet 40c to a warp passage 40a for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage part 40b on which a game ball passing through the warp passage 40a can roll. And are provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the first starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 33, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is the first starting winning opening 36 or the ordinary variation. It is easy to win the winning device 33. A lamp display device 80 is provided on the lower right side of the game area 32. The lamp display device 80 displays the number of starting memories of each special figure variation display game and the like.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 115) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit in the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, the universal figure variation display game is executed.

The general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left gaming area 32 of the center case 40, and the general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into these general winning openings 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 115) provided in the general winning openings 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a first starting winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 for giving a starting condition of the special figure 1 variable display game is provided, and an ordinary variable winning device 33 is provided directly below the winning opening. Is provided. The normal variation winning device 33 includes a movable member 33c that converts the game ball into a state in which the game ball can flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side. When the movable member 33c is in the closed state, the game ball cannot normally win the variable winning device 33.

In the second embodiment, unlike the conventional case, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning memory is stored, depending on the winning of the prize hole of the ordinary variable prize device 33 (Phoden prize hole). It is configured to be stored. Therefore, the ordinary electric prize opening (first starting winning area) is included in the category of the first starting winning opening 36, and the ordinary electric prize switch is included in the category of the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 115). That is, the ordinary electric winning opening and the first starting winning opening 36 correspond to a plurality of first starting winning areas, and at least a part of the first starting winning areas is in a closed state and an open state. It is configured as a normal variation winning device 33 having a movable member 33c that can be converted into.

In the second embodiment, the game control device (game control means) 100 controls the movable member 33c of the normal variation winning device 33 into an open state and a closed state based on a predetermined lottery result of the universal figure variation display game. It is connected to a universal electric solenoid 33b (conversion control means) for performing (see FIG. 115). The movable member 33c of the ordinary variable winning device 33 is an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that opens the ordinary electric winning opening by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side by the ordinary electric solenoid 33b. As the movable member 33c of the normal variation winning device 33, by sliding the movable member 33c in the front-back direction by the universal electric solenoid 33b to advance and retreat, a so-called bello type in which a game ball can flow into the regular electric prize opening Ordinary electric accessory may be provided. When the result of the universal figure variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the game control apparatus 100 rotates the movable member 33c through the universal electric solenoid 33b to open it, and the game ball normally varies. It is changed to an open state in which it can flow into 33.

Further, the game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy winning state by shortening the variation time of the universal figure changing display game or increasing the hit probability of the universal figure changing display game to a higher probability than usual, or A time saving state (normal power support (electric power support) state) is generated by lengthening the occurrence time of the easy winning state rather than the easy winning state generated in the gaming state.

In the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40, a second starting winning opening (second starting winning area) 37 for providing a starting condition of the special figure 2 variable display game is provided. Further, a first special variation winning device (lower big winning port) 38 is provided on the left side of the second starting winning port 37, and a second special variation winning device (upper) is provided above the second starting winning port 37. A special winning opening 39 is provided.

In the second embodiment, the first special variation winning device (lower major winning opening) 38 has a sliding type opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c, which is a tongue-shaped member, moving forwards and backwards to play the large winning opening. The ball is converted into a state in which it can flow in (see, for example, JP-A-2017-77362). The first special variation winning device 38 converts the special winning opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game balls into the special winning opening, thereby allowing the player to play. Is given a predetermined game value (prize ball).

The second special variation winning device (upper special winning opening) 39 is provided with a movable member 39c that is rotated in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side, thereby converting the game ball into a state in which it easily flows. When the movable member 39c is in the closed state, the game ball cannot be won in the special variation winning device 39. The second special variation winning device 39 changes the state of the special winning opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the upper special winning opening. Is given a predetermined game value (prize ball).

The game control device (game control means) 100 can generate a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined special result. In the second embodiment, the special game state is a small hit (first special game state) that can occur when the small hit mode (first special result) and a big hit mode (second special result). It includes a big hit (second special game state) that can be generated when.

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100, based on the winning of the game ball to the Poden winning opening (first starting winning area) or the first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area) It is possible to control the execution of the variable display game (first variable display game). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a first execution control means for performing such control.

Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening (second starting winning area) 37. It is possible to control. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a second execution control means for performing such control.

Further, as will be described later, the game control device (game control means) 100 has a situation in which the player is more advantageous than the normal game state after the big hit (second special game state) (the hit probability is high, and , It is possible to perform control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can be progressed with the support of the ordinary electric train. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a specific game state generation means for performing such control.

General winning opening 35, first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, ordinary variable winning device 33, large winning opening of first special variable winning device 38, and large winning of second special winning device 39 When the game balls are won in the mouth, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 115) discharges the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning port from the payout device to the upper plate 21. Further, in the game area 32 below the normal variation winning device 37, an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize is provided.

A ball guiding unit 850 is provided on the upper right of the second special variation winning device 39. The ball guiding portion 850 is a member that rolls the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area 32 in the lateral direction and guides it to the second special variation winning device 39 or the like.

Further, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board body 30a, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a general figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 59 that display information such as the current game state.

[Lamp display]
FIG. 112 is a diagram showing the configuration of the lamp display device 80 according to the second embodiment. The lamp display device 80 is a lamp display unit 1 or 2 (LED) that performs a variable display (blinking) that repeats a lighted display and a lighted-off display as a symbol (fourth special symbol), and the number of starting memories of each special symbol variable display game. It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for (holding number) notification. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300.

The lamp display sections 1 and 2 blink as a variable display at a predetermined blinking cycle. While the variation time of the variation display in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the general figure display 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The change time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300.

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (decorative special figure 1 holding LED 1, decorative special figure 1 holding LED 2) display the decorative special figure 1 holding number (first starting memory number) depending on the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display parts 5 and 6 (decorative special figure 2 holding LED1, decorative special figure 2 holding LED2) indicate the decorative special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) depending on the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. indicate.

The blinking cycle of the lamp display sections 1 and 2 (fourth special symbol to be described later) and the blinking cycle of the lamp display section 3-6 (decoration of special decoration) are both set to the same 200 msec (100 msec on, 100 msec off). However, the blinking cycle may be different so that the decorative special figure reservation and the fourth special symbol can be easily distinguished. Further, the on/off (display/non-display) time of the lamp display section 1-6 may be different.

FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the configuration of the collective display device 50 in the second embodiment. The collective display device 50 is composed of a 7-segment type display device (LED lamp) or the like, and is a first special figure fluctuation display portion 51 (special figure 1 display device) (lamp D1) and a second special figure for a variable display game. The fluctuation display section 52 (special figure 2 display) (lamp D2) is provided. In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a round display section 53 (lamps D3 to D7) for displaying the number of rounds (number of times of opening and closing of the special variation winning devices 38, 39) at the time of a big hit, and a special figure 1 variation display. A memory display unit 54 (special figure 1 hold indicator) (lamps D11-D14) for informing the number of stored (starting) games is stored. In addition, the collective display device 50 has a general figure storage display unit 55 (general figure hold display) (lamps D15 to D16) for informing the number of starting (holding) memories of the general figure variable display game.

In addition, the collective display device 50, a first game state display unit 56 (first game state display unit, probability state display unit) (lamp D9) that indicates a winning probability state (a high probability state or a low probability state), and shoots. It has a second game state display section 57 (second game state indicator) (D17) for displaying a direction (left-handed or right-handed) instruction. Further, the collective display device 50 has a third game state display section 58 (third game state indicator) (lamps D8, D10, D18) for displaying the hit state of the universal figure variation display game. In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a fourth gaming state display unit 59 (fourth gaming state display unit, suspended state display unit) (indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended. Lamps D19, D20).

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a lighting mode of various display units 53-58 (lamps D3-D20) which constitute the collective display device 50 in the second embodiment. The collective display device 50 displays the state of the gaming machine corresponding to the lighting mode of the various display units 53-57. The round display portion 53 (lamps D3 to D7) is lit according to the number of rounds, and the storage display portion 54 (lamps D11 to D14) is lit according to the holding number (starting storage number) of the special figure 1 variable display game. To do.

The universal figure storage display unit (D15-D16) 55 lights up in accordance with the number of held universal figure display games (number of starting memories). In the first gaming state display portion 56 (lamps D9 and D17), the lamp D9 is turned on in a high probability state and the lamp D9 is turned off in a low probability state. In the second gaming state display portion 57 (lamp D17), the lamp D17 is turned on when the player hits the ball to the right, and the lamp D17 is turned off when the ball is hit to the left. In the third gaming state display portion 58 (lamps D8, D10, D18), the respective lamps are turned on/off/blinking according to the lottery result of the universal figure variation display game. It is to be noted that the opening time and the number of times of opening of the winning a prize (universal prize winning a prize) of the normal variable winning a prize device 33 are different in the case of 1 per figure, 2 per figure, and 3 per figure shown in FIG. 114, respectively. You can

In the fourth gaming state display portion 59 (lamps D19-D20), D19 is lit while the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, and D20 is lit while the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted. In this case, the interruption signal may be output as the external information.

[Game control device]
FIG. 115 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of the game control device 100 according to the second embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration example of the control system of the game control device 100 in the second embodiment will be described, but unless otherwise specified, the configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment.

In the second embodiment, a gate switch 34a is provided for the game control device 100 of the first embodiment. The gate switch 34 is connected to the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121. The gate switch 34a detects winning of the universal figure starting gate 34. In addition, in the second embodiment, a universal electric solenoid 33b is provided for the game control device 100 of the first embodiment. The universal solenoid 33b is connected to the first driver 138a.

Then, as will be described later, when the universal figure random number value extracted when passing through the universal figure starting gate 34 is a hit value, the game control device 100 drives the universal solenoid 33b to move the movable member 33c for a predetermined time. It is rotated (for example, for 0.3 seconds) to open, and the game ball is changed to an open state in which the game ball easily flows into the normal variation winning device 33.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as described above, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning depending on the winning of the prize hole of the ordinary variable prize device 33 (Phoden prize hole). It is configured to store memories. Therefore, the ordinary electric prize opening switch is included in the category of the starting opening 1 switch 36a.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (shift) of the game state by the above-mentioned game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 116 is a diagram exemplifying a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in the second embodiment. FIG. 116 is a summary of each game state, and shows the control by the game control device 100 in each game state, the control by the effect control device 300, and the features in the game state. In the second embodiment, the gaming state includes a normal gaming state, a first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a third specific gaming state.

First, each gaming state will be described. In the normal game state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (hit probability of a special figure) to be a low probability and the normal electric power support (electric power support) is absent. Further, in the normal game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the normal mode. Also, in the normal gaming state, left-handed shooting is recommended as the shooting direction. Therefore, since the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, the main variation special figure becomes the special figure 1 variation display game.

In the first specific game state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) to be a high probability, and there is universal electric power support (the number of times of support is 50 times). That is, in the first specific game state, the conversion control by the universal solenoid (conversion control means) 33b is controlled to be executed more than in the normal game state, and the probability state is set to the high probability state. ..

Moreover, in the first specific game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the probability variation mode. Further, in the first specific game state, it is recommended that the game ball be launched rightward. By hitting the ball to the right, it becomes easier to win the prize in the universal figure starting gate 34, and the main starting area is the winning opening (normal electric winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33. In the second embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game is executed by winning a prize at the Poden prize hole, so the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variable display game.

In the second specific game state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) to be a high probability and the normal electric power support is absent. That is, when the above-mentioned first specific game state is transferred to the second specific game state, the conversion control by the universal electric solenoid (conversion control means) 33b is returned to the same control as the normal game state, and the special figure It can be said that the probability state of is set to the high probability state (FIG. 119).

Moreover, in the second specific game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the small hit RUSH. As will be described later, since the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is set to a short time in the second specific game state, the small hit RUSH can be said to be a state in which the small hits are likely to occur continuously in a short period of time. .. As described above, in the second embodiment, when the second specific game state is executed, a small hit (first special result) is derived as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game). It is possible.

Further, in the second specific game state, it is recommended that the game ball be launched rightward. Therefore, the main starting area is the second starting winning opening 37, and the main variation special figure is the special figure 2 variation display game.

In the third specific game state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (hit probability of a special figure) to be a low probability, and there is universal electric power support (the number of times of support is 50 times). Moreover, in the third specific game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the time saving mode. Further, in the third specific game state, it is recommended that the game ball be launched rightward. By hitting the ball to the right, it becomes easier to win the prize in the universal figure starting gate 34, and the main starting area is the winning opening (normal electric winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33. In the second embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game is executed by winning a prize at the Poden prize hole, so the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variable display game.

Next, the transition (shift) from each gaming state will be described. It is assumed that a big hit (second special game state) occurs in the normal game state. If the big hit is a probability change big hit, after the big hit state ends, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state. On the other hand, when the big hit is the normal big hit in the normal game state, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the third specific game state.

When a normal big hit occurs in the first specific game state, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts from the first specific game state to the third specific game state. In addition, when the probability variation big hit occurs in the first specific game state, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts to the first specific game state again. On the other hand, in the first specific game state, when the jackpot does not occur and the universal electric power support ends, the game state shifts from the first specific game state to the second specific game state (“high support regulation in FIG. 116”). The “number of times” ends. “High support” means that the probability of hitting is high and there is electric support).

That is, in the first specific game state, as a condition for transition to another game state, the occurrence of a big hit (second special game state) is set as a condition (first transition condition), and a predetermined number of normal electric power support In some cases, (execution of variable display game) may be a condition (second transition condition). By doing so, for example, the first specific game state can be generated after a big hit (second special game state) in the normal game state, but in the first specific game state, When the second transition condition is satisfied, the second specific game state can be generated.

In the second specific game state, if the big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts from the second specific game state to the first specific game state. On the other hand, if the big hit is the normal big hit in the second specific game state, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts from the second specific game state to the third specific game state. That is, in the second specific game state, as a condition for transitioning to another game state, a big hit (second special game state) is generated.

When the probability variation big hit occurs in the third specific game state, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts from the third specific game state to the first specific game state. If a normal big hit occurs in the third specific game state, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts to the third specific game state again. On the other hand, in the third specific game state, when the jackpot does not occur and the universal electric power support ends, the game state shifts from the third specific game state to the normal game state (“low support prescribed number of times” in FIG. 116). "End". Note that "low support" means that the winning probability is low and there is electric support).

Since the gaming state shifts in this way, after the probability variation big hit occurs in the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state. In the first specific game state, since the usual electric power support is executed and the hit probability is set to a high probability, a big hit can be easily generated. And the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, even if a big hit does not occur in the first specific game state, in the second embodiment, the game state shifts from the first specific game state to the second specific game state. In the second specific game state, although the normal electric power support is not executed, the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed by winning the second start opening 37. Here, unlike the special figure 1 variable display game, the small hit probability in the special figure 2 variable display game is set to a high probability (in FIG. 119 described later, the small hit probability is set to an extremely high probability). Therefore, in the second specific game state, it is possible to execute the "small hit RUSH" mode in which a small hit (first special game status) is frequently generated until the next big hit occurs. Further, since it is possible to increase the number of balls to be played in a gaming state other than the big hit (second special gaming state), it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 having a novel gaming property.

Also, in the first specific game state, there is normal power support, and in the second specific game state, there is no normal power support as in the normal game state, so a small hit (first special game state) It is possible to execute the second variable display game in which a large number of characters are allocated at a good tempo.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation display game is executed with a high probability of a big hit in the second specific game state, so that a big hit (second special game state) occurs at an appropriate timing and another game state occurs. The transition condition of is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an extreme increase in payout due to excessive continuation of the second specific game state.

Hereinafter, each process in the second embodiment will be described. The processing added in the second embodiment and the processing that will be described again for easy understanding are denoted by "A*****", followed by the number "A" in the 10,000 range.

[Timer interrupt processing]
The timer interrupt process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program) in the second embodiment. 117 is obtained by adding the process of step A11311 between step A1311 and step A1312 in FIG. Therefore, the processes of steps A1301 to A1311 and the processes of steps A1312 to A1315 have the same contents as those in FIG.

In step A11311, the game control device 100 executes a universal figure game process for performing a process related to the universal figure variation display game (A11311). The details of the public figure game process will be described later with reference to FIG.

By doing so, in the second embodiment, the universal figure variation display game can be executed. Then, when the universal figure variation display game is in the winning mode, the special variation 1 special display 1 variation display game is performed by opening the prize opening of the ordinary variation winning device 33 (the Poden winning opening) and winning the game ball at the Poden winning opening. Can start.

Especially, in the first specific game state and the third specific game state, the universal electric power support is executed (see FIG. 116). In the first specific game state, the special electric figure 1 variable display game can be frequently started by the electric power support (electric power support), and since the winning probability is high, a big hit is likely to occur. be able to. In addition, even in the third specific game state, the special display 1 variable display game can be easily caused frequently by the normal electric power support.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (A3510) in the special figure 1 normal process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 118A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the Toku-zu 1 variation start process in the second embodiment. FIG. 118A is obtained by adding the process of step A13718 after step A3717 in FIG. Therefore, the processing from steps A3701 to A3716 has the same contents as in FIG.

Compared with the Toku-zu 1 fluctuation start processing in the first embodiment, the contents of the high-probability fluctuation count update processing (A3717) are partially different in the second embodiment, and a new time saving fluctuation count update processing (A13718) is added. Has been done.

The high-probability variation number update process (A3717) is a process of managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in a state where the winning probability is high. The time saving change count updating process (A13718) is a process of updating the time shortening change count, checking the end of universal communication support, and setting necessary information. The details of the high-probability variation number updating process (A3717) and the time saving variation number updating process (A13718) in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121, respectively.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the high probability variation number update process (A3717) is executed in the special figure 1 variation start process, so that it is possible to shift to the second specific game state with a high support prescribed number.

Further, in the second embodiment, since the time saving variation number updating process (A13718) is executed in the special figure 1 variation starting process, it is possible to shift to the normal game state with a low support prescribed number.

[Special map 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (A3605) in the special figure 2 normal process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 118B is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 variation start processing in the second embodiment. FIG. 118B is obtained by adding the process of step A13809 after step A3808 in FIG. Therefore, the processing from steps A3801 to A3808 has the same contents as in FIG.

The high-probability variation number updating process (A3808) is a process of managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high-probability state where the hit probability is high. The time-shortening change count updating process (A13809) is a process of updating the time-shortening change count, checking the end of universal communication support, and setting necessary information. The details of the high-probability variation number updating process (A3808) and the time saving variation number updating process (A13809) in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121, respectively.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the high probability variation number update process (A3808) is executed in the special figure 2 variation start process, so that it is possible to shift to the second specific game state with a high support prescribed number.

Further, in the second embodiment, since the time saving variation number update processing (A13809) is executed in the special figure 2 variation start processing, it is possible to shift to the normal game state with a low support prescribed number.

FIG. 119 is a table exemplifying the big hit probability, the small hit probability, the outfall probability, and the probability variation probability in the second embodiment. These tables show the big hit probability (probability that the judgment result will be a big hit), the small hit probability (probability that the judgment result will be a small hit), and the off probability (the judgment result is off when the big hit judging process and the small hit judging process are described above. Probability and probability change probability (probability change inrush rate) for the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. 119(a) shows the probability in the low probability state, FIG. 119(b) shows the probability in the high probability state, and FIG. 119(c) shows the probability variation inrush rate.

Also in the second embodiment, the jackpot probability (probability of jackpot) is higher in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. The small hit probability (probability of small hit) is the same in the high probability state and the low probability state. It is also possible to increase the small hit probability in the high probability state and decrease it in the low probability state. For example, in the low probability state, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 variable display game may be set to “0”. Further, the outlier probability (probability of the outage) is lower in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a big hit mode (second special result) in the special figure 1 variable display game (first variable display game) or the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game). The probability setting means is controllable to a low-probability state in which the probability of being derived is set to a low probability and a high-probability state in which a probability higher than the low-probability state is set.

Further, in the second embodiment, the big hit probability is common to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 variable display in the special figure 2 variable display game. The outlier probability is higher than that in the game, and is lower in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 1 variable display game (in the high probability state, the off probability is 0 in the special figure 2 variable display game). Therefore, in the second specific game state, a small hit can be generated with an extremely high probability by winning the second start winning port 37.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45, in the low-probability state, the second half offset data for long-time fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is set (A4507), and the long-term fluctuation (long variable) of the special figure 2 variable display game is set. )become. However, in the high probability state, since the latter half offset data for long-time fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is not set, the normal fluctuation time variation in the special figure 2 variable display game (short variation compared to long variation) become. As a result, in the second specific game state of the high probability state, a small hit occurs more frequently in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the low probability state (small hit RUSH).

In the second embodiment, the probability change state or the normal state is set after the big hit state ends. As shown in FIG. 119(c), the 16R certainty variation inrush rate is 2% for both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, and the 4R certainty variation inrush rate is 2% for the special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 Both floating display games are 60%. That is, the probability variation rush rate is set to 62%. Then, after the big hit ends, the time saving of 50 rotations and the universal power support are executed.

It should be noted that the 16R certainty variation rush rate is, for example, 2% for the special figure 1 variable display game, 40% for the special figure 2 variation display game, and the 4R certainty variation rush rate is, for example, 60% for the special figure 1 variation display game. The distribution of the number of rounds of the big hits in the probability variation state of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be set to be different, such as 22% in the variable display game of FIG. With this configuration, if the odds change big hit is won in the small hit RUSH mode, it is possible to obtain a large number of game balls even during the big hit game, so that more small hits are generated during the small hit RUSH. In addition to improving the game motivation of the player who is trying to acquire a game ball, it is possible to improve the degree of expectation for the probability variation jackpot winning.

In addition, the occurrence of the probability variation big hit may trigger the end of the small hit RUSH mode, so the occurrence of the probability variation big hit may reduce the player's willingness to play the game, but it is possible to obtain sufficient game balls even with this probability variation big hit. Therefore, while maintaining the player's willingness to play, it becomes possible to give a new player's willingness to try to enter the small hit RUSH again.

[High probability change count update process]
Next, the high probability variation number update processing (A3717 (Special figure 1 variation start processing) and A3808 (Special figure 2 variation start processing)) of the special figure 1 variation start processing and the special figure 2 variation start processing in the second embodiment is performed. Details will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the high-probability variation number update processing in the second embodiment. In the high-probability variation number update processing, the variation number of the special figure variation display game started in the high-probability state (here, the high-probability variation number as the remaining variation number) is updated and managed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A15101). When it is not in the high-probability state (in the low-probability state) (the result of A15101 is “N”), the high-probability fluctuation number updating process is ended.

When the game control device 100 is in the high probability state (result of A15101 is “Y”), the high probability variation number indicating the remaining number of the special figure variation display game started in the high probability state is updated by −1 (1 (A15102). The initial value of the number of high-probability fluctuations is the number of fluctuations in which the high-probability state is maintained after the big hit ends, and is set to, for example, 50 times (special figure 1 big hit end processing or special figure 2 big hit end processing described later). ). In addition, regardless of whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts fluctuating, the number of high-probability fluctuations is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (A15103). When the number of high probability changes is not 0 (the result of A15103 is “N”), that is, when the high probability state continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 determines the number of high probability changes. The update process ends. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (the result of A15103 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding high probability & no time saving in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A15104).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the special figure high probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A15105), and corresponds to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to start changing. The high-probability & non-time saving final fluctuation flag is set (A15106), and the high-probability fluctuation count updating process is terminated. The high-probability & non-time saving final fluctuation flag will be described later.

In this way, by executing the high-probability fluctuation number update processing in the second embodiment, the second specific game state (high probability) is appropriately changed from the state of the first specific game state (high probability, with electric support). , And there is no power support (particularly A15105).

[Time-saving fluctuation count update process]
Next, details of the time saving variation number updating process (A13718 (Tokugatsu 1 variation start process)) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time saving variation count updating process in the second embodiment.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a short period of time (state with low probability & electric support) (A15201). When it is not during the time saving (the result of A15201 is “N”), the time saving variation number updating process ends.

When the game control device 100 is in the middle of time saving (low probability & status with electric support) (result of A15201 is “Y”), the number of time saving fluctuations is updated by −1 (by subtracting 1) (A15202). The initial value of the number of time saving fluctuations is the number of times the time saving mode is maintained after the big hit ends, and is set to, for example, 50 times (special figure 1 big hit ending process or special figure 2 in a second embodiment described later). Jackpot end processing). In addition, regardless of whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts changing, the number of time-saving changes is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of time saving fluctuations is 0 (A15203). When the number of time saving fluctuations is not 0 (the result of A15203 is “N”), that is, when the time saving mode continues at the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game, the game control device 100 performs the processing for updating the number of time saving fluctuations. finish. When the number of time saving fluctuations is 0 (result of A15203 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding low probability & no time saving in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A15204).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A15205), and corresponds to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to start changing. The low-probability & no time saving final variation flag is set (A15206), and the time saving variation number updating process ends.

In this way, by executing the time saving variation number updating process in the second embodiment, the normal game state (low probability, no power support is provided) is appropriately changed from the state of the third specific game state (low probability, power support is provided). It is possible to shift to the state of () (in particular, A15205).

As described above, in the second embodiment, a part of the high-probability variation number processing in the first embodiment is changed, and the time-shortening variation number updating processing is added. Therefore, as the flag corresponding to the high-probability final fluctuation flag in the first embodiment, a high-probability & no time saving final fluctuation flag (A15106) and a low-probability & no time saving final fluctuation flag (A15206) are introduced.

In order to cope with such a change, in the second embodiment, the “high probability final change?” of steps A2714, A3515, A3608, A5728, A5745, A5828, A5848 in the first embodiment is “final change?”. Read as The “final change” is a final change in which the low probability and time saving state ends, and when the low probability & no time saving final change flag is set, it is determined that the final change in the low probability and time saving state has ended. When the high-probability & short-time-less final fluctuation flag is set, it is determined that the high-probability and short-time final fluctuation has ended.

Further, in the second embodiment, “high probability medium or high” in steps A2712, A3514, A3607, A5737, and A5837 in the first embodiment is replaced with “high probability or time saving medium?”.

Further, in the second embodiment, the “clear high probability variation frequency region” of step A5907 in the first embodiment is read as “clear high probability variation frequency region and time reduction variation frequency region”. Further, in the second embodiment, “clear high probability final variation flag area” of step A5909 in the first embodiment is read as “clear final variation flag area”.

The "final change flag area" is a high probability & short time final fluctuation flag area that stores a high probability & no time saving final fluctuation flag, and a low probability & low time saving final fluctuation that stores a low probability & no time saving final fluctuation flag. Includes flag area.

[Special map 1 big hit end processing]
Details of the special figure 1 big hit ending process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a first flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the second embodiment. In addition, FIG. 123 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the second embodiment.

The game control device 100 first sets "0" as the process number to return to the normal process of the special figure 1 (A16701), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A16702). Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the big hit (off data of one big hit signal, off data of three big hits) in the external information output data area (A16703).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (A16704). Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the probability variation determination data is low probability data (A16705). Here, in the second embodiment, the probability variation determination data includes high-probability data (high probability, with electric support) and low-probability data (low probability, with electric support). If the probability variation determination data is not low probability data (low probability, with electric support) (“N” in step A16705), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start with high probability & time saving in the external information output data area. (A16706). On the other hand, when the probability variation determination data is low-probability data (low probability, there is electric power support) (“Y” in step A16705), the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A16720 and thereafter. The processing after step A16720 will be described later.

After the processing of step A16706, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A16707). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start with high probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A16708). After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal (launching position designation signal 1) related to the right-handing instruction in the test signal output data area (A16709).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number in the high probability in the game state display number area (A16710), saves the number in the right hitting state in the game state display number 2 area (A16711), and round LED pointer. The off number is saved in the area (A16712). Next, the flag during fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A16713), and the flag during fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring organization flag area (A16714). The area is cleared (A16715).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16716). As a result, in the first specific game state, it is possible to make the hit probability high and execute the universal electric power support. Then, in the first specific game state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be frequently executed in a high probability state. Then, while saving the initial value of the high-probability fluctuation count (for example, 50 times) in the high-probability fluctuation count area for holding the high-probability fluctuation count, the short-time fluctuation count is stored in the time-short fluctuation count area for holding the time-short fluctuation count. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16717). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 upon power recovery (A16718), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is set to the special figure 2 game. The data is saved in the processing timer area (A16719), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is ended.

In the above-mentioned step A16705, when the probability variation determination data is low-probability data (low probability, there is electric support) (“Y” in step A16705), the game control device 100 sends a signal regarding start of low probability & time saving. The data is saved in the external information output data area (A16720).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A16721). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start with low probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A16722). After that, the signal (launching position designation signal 1) related to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A16723).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game status display number area (A16724), saves the right hitting number in the game status display number 2 area (A16725), and round LED pointer. The off number is saved in the area (A16726). Then, the flag during fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A16727), the flag during fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A16728), and the special figure status The area is cleared (A16729).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16730). As a result, in the third specific game state, the normal power support and the time saving mode can be executed. Then, the special figure 1 variable display game can be generated frequently. Then, while saving the initial value of the low-probability fluctuation count (for example, 50 times) in the low-probability fluctuation count area for holding the low-probability fluctuation count, the short-time fluctuation count is stored in the low-probability fluctuation count area for holding the time-short fluctuation count. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16731). After that, the probability information (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at power recovery (A16732), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is set to the special figure 2 game process. The data is saved in the timer area (A16733), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is ended.

By doing this, after the special figure 1 big hit, when the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, there is electric support)), the winning probability is It is possible to shift to the first specific game state by setting the probability to be high and with the support for normal electric power. In addition, when the probability variation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, with electric support) after the end of the special figure 1 big hit, the hit probability is set to low probability and there is support for Dentsu. As a result, it is possible to shift to the third specific game state.

[Special figure 2 Big hit end processing]
Details of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 124 is a first flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 2 big hit end processing in the second embodiment. Further, FIG. 125 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the second embodiment.

The game control device 100 first sets "0" as the process number to return to the normal process of the special figure 2 (A16801), and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A16802). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the big hit (off data of one big hit signal, off data of three big hits) in the external information output data area (A16803).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (A16804). Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the probability variation determination data is low probability data (A16805). Here, in the second embodiment, the probability variation determination data includes high-probability data (high probability, with electric support) and low-probability data (low probability, with electric support). When the probability variation determination data is not the low probability data (low probability, there is electric power support) (“N” in step A16805), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start with high probability & time saving in the external information output data area. (A16806). On the other hand, when the probability variation determination data is low-probability data (low probability, there is electric power support) (“Y” in step A16805), the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A16820 and subsequent steps. The processing after step A16820 will be described later.

After the processing of step A16806, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A16807). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start with high probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A16808). After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal (launching position designation signal 1) related to the right-handing instruction in the test signal output data area (A16809).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number in the high probability in the game state display number area (A16810), saves the number in the right hitting state in the game state display number 2 area (A16811), and round LED pointer. The off number is saved in the area (A16812). Next, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A16813), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring organization flag area (A16814). The area is cleared (A16815).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16816). As a result, in the first specific game state, it is possible to make the hit probability high and execute the universal electric power support. Then, in the first specific game state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be frequently executed in a high probability state. Then, while saving the initial value of the high-probability fluctuation count (for example, 50 times) in the high-probability fluctuation count area for holding the high-probability fluctuation count, the short-time fluctuation count is stored in the time-short fluctuation count area for holding the time-short fluctuation count. The initial value of (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16817). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16818), and the special figure 2 jackpot end processing is ended.

In the above-mentioned step A16805, when the probability variation determination data is low-probability data (low probability, with electric support) (“Y” in step A16805), the game control device 100 sends a signal regarding start of low probability & time saving. The data is saved in the external information output data area (A16820).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A16821). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start with low probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A16822). After that, the signal related to the right-handing instruction (launching position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A16823).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game status display number area (A16824), saves the right hitting number in the game status display number 2 area (A16825), and round LED pointer. The off number is saved in the area (A16826). Next, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper special prize mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (A16827), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower special winning mouth fraud start period flag area (A16828). The area is cleared (A16829).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16830). As a result, in the third specific game state, the normal power support and the time saving mode can be executed. Then, the special figure 1 variable display game can be generated frequently. Then, while saving the initial value of the low-probability fluctuation count (for example, 50 times) in the low-probability fluctuation count area for holding the low-probability fluctuation count, the short-time fluctuation count is stored in the low-probability fluctuation count area for holding the time-short fluctuation count. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16831). After that, the probability information (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power recovery (A16832), and the special figure 2 jackpot end processing is ended.

By doing this, after the special figure 2 big hit, when the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, there is electric support)), the hit probability is It is possible to shift to the first specific game state by setting the probability to be high and with the support for normal electric power. In addition, after the special figure 2 big hit, when the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, there is electric support), the hit probability is set to low probability and there is POD support. , It is possible to shift to the third specific game state.

[Special drawing 1 small hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 small hitting end processing (A3218) in the special figure 1 game processing of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 small hit end processing in the second embodiment. In FIG. 126, the process of step A17207 is added between steps A7207 and A7208 in FIG. Therefore, the processing from steps A7201 to A7207 and the processing from steps A7208 to A7210 have the same contents as in FIG.

In step A17207, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is during time saving (A17207). When the game control device 100 determines that the time is not shortened (result of A17207 is “N”), the process of step A7208 and subsequent steps is executed. On the other hand, if the time is shortening (result of A17207 is “Y”), the processes of step A7210 and subsequent steps are executed.

By doing so, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not short, it is possible to shift to the normal game state in which the shooting direction is left-handed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hitting end processing (A3321) in the special figure 2 game processing of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing a procedure of special figure 2 small hitting end processing in the second embodiment. In FIG. 127, the process of step A17308 is added between steps A7308 and A7309 in FIG. 73. Therefore, the processing from steps A7301 to A7308 and the processing from steps A7309 to A7310 have the same contents as in FIG.

In step A17308, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in time saving (A17308). Then, when the game control device 100 determines that it is not in the time saving period (the result of A17308 is “N”), it executes the process of step A7309. On the other hand, when it is in the time saving period (the result of A17308 is “Y”). , Special figure 2 small hit end processing ends.

By doing so, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not short, it is possible to shift to the normal game state in which the shooting direction is left-handed.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end process (modified example of the second embodiment)]
A modification of the above-described Toku-zu 1 big hit ending process (A3214) in the Toku-zu 1 game process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 128 is a first flowchart showing a modification of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the second embodiment. In addition, FIG. 129 is a second flowchart showing a modification of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the second embodiment.

128 and 129 are obtained by adding the processes of steps A19719 to A19723 and the processes of steps A19733 to A19737 to the processes of FIGS. 122 and 123. Therefore, the processes of steps A16701 to A16718 and steps A16720 to A16732 have the same contents as those of FIGS. 122 and 123, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In step A19719, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (A19719). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. If the special display 2 variable display game is not suspended (result of A19719 is "N"), clear the special Fig. 2 game interruption flag area in which the special illustration 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (A19722), The 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A19723), and the special figure 1 jackpot end process is ended.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (result of A19719 is “Y”), the game control device 100 produces a decoration special figure 2 restart command for instructing restart of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Prepare as a command (A19720), and execute the effect command setting process (A19721). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 2 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. After that, the processes of steps A19722 and A19723 described above are executed, and the special figure 1 big hit ending process is ended.

Further, in step A19733, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (A19733). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended (result of A19703 is "N"), clear the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (A19736), The 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A19737), and the special figure 1 big hit ending process is ended.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (result of A19733 is “Y”), the game control device 100 produces a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing restart of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. It is prepared as a command (A19734), and effect command setting processing is executed (A19735). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 2 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. After that, the processes of steps A19736 and A19737 described above are executed, and the toku-zu 1 big hit ending process is ended.

It can be said that FIGS. 128 and 129 are modifications of the modification of the toku-zu 1 big hit ending process in the first embodiment so as to be applicable to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effects of the modified example of the toku-zu 1 big hit ending process in the first embodiment, the following effects in the second embodiment are provided. That is, when the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with electricity support)) after the special figure 1 big hit ends, the hit probability is set to a high probability. At the same time, it is possible to shift to the first specific game state, with the usual electric power support. In addition, when the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, there is electric support) after the special figure 1 big hit is finished, the hit probability is set to low probability and the ordinary electric power support is set. , It is possible to shift to the third specific game state.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing (modified example of the second embodiment)]
A modified example of the above-mentioned special figure 2 big hit ending process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 130 is a first flowchart showing a modification of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the second embodiment. In addition, FIG. 131 is a second flowchart showing a modification of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the second embodiment.

130 and 131 are obtained by adding the processes of steps A19819 to A19722 and the processes of steps A19833 to A19836 to the processes of FIGS. 124 and 125. Therefore, the processes of steps A16801 to A16818 and steps A16820 to A16832 have the same contents as in FIGS.

In step A19819, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (A19819). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. If the Toku-zu 1 variable display game is not suspended (result of A19819 is "N"), the Toku-zu 1 game-interruption flag area in which the Toku-zu 1 game-interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (A19822). 2 The big hit ending process ends.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (result of A19819 is “Y”), the game control device 100 directs a decorative special figure 1 restart command for instructing restart of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. It is prepared as a command (A19820), and effect command setting processing is executed (A19821). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 1 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. After that, the above-mentioned processing of step A19822 is executed, and the special figure 2 big hit end processing is ended.

In step A19833, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (A19833). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. If the Toku-zu 1 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of A19833 is "N"), the Toku-zu 1 game-interrupt flag area in which the Toku-zu 1 game-interrupt flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (A19836), 2 The big hit ending process ends.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (result of A19833 is “Y”), the game control device 100 directs a decorative special figure 1 restart command for instructing restart of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. It is prepared as a command (A19834), and effect command setting processing is executed (A19835). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 1 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. After that, the processing of the above-described step A19836 is executed, and the special figure 2 big hit ending processing is ended.

It can be said that FIG. 130 and FIG. 131 are modifications of the modification of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the first embodiment so as to be applicable to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effects of the modified example of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the first embodiment, the following effects in the second embodiment are provided. That is, when the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, there is a general electric support)) after the end of the special figure 2 big hit, the hit probability is set to be a high probability. It is possible to shift to the first specific game state with the presence of the power support. In addition, when the probability variation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, with Poden support) after the end of the special figure 2 big hit, the hit probability is set as low probability and Poden support is set, It is possible to shift to the third specific game state.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing (modification)]
Next, a modification of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 1 small hitting end processing according to the modification. In FIG. 132, the process of step A17207 is added between step A7207 and step A7208 in FIG. 88. Therefore, the processing from steps A7201 to A7207 and the processing from steps A7208 to S8814 have the same contents as in FIG.

In Step A17207, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is during time saving (A17207). When the game control device 100 determines that the time is not shortened (result of A17207 is “N”), the process of step A7208 and subsequent steps is executed. On the other hand, when the time is shortening (the result of A17207 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the processing of step S8810 and the subsequent steps.

It can be said that FIG. 132 is a modification of the special figure 1 small hitting end processing in the first embodiment so as to be applicable to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modified example of the special figure 1 small hit end processing in the first embodiment, the following effect is achieved. That is, by the above processing, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not short, it is possible to shift to the normal game state in which the shooting direction is left-handed.

[Special figure 2 Small hit end processing (modified example)]
Next, a modified example of the special figure 2 small hitting end processing (A3321) in the special figure 2 game processing of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 2 small hitting end processing according to the modification. In FIG. 133, the process of step A17308 is added between steps A7308 and A7309 in FIG. 89. Therefore, the processing from steps A7301 to A7308 and the processing from steps A7309 to S8914 have the same contents as those in FIG. 89, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In Step A17308, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is during time saving (A17308). Then, when it is determined that the time is not shortening (the result of A17308 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A7309 and thereafter. On the other hand, when it is in time saving (the result of A17308 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A8911 and the subsequent steps.

It can be said that FIG. 133 is a modification of the special figure 2 small hitting end processing in the first embodiment so as to be applicable to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modified example of the special figure 2 small hitting end processing in the first embodiment, the following effect is achieved. That is, by the above processing, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not short, it is possible to shift to the normal game state in which the shooting direction is left-handed.

[Public game processing]
Next, details of the universal figure game process (A11310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the universal figure game process. In the general figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process relating to the general figure variable display game is controlled, the display of the general figure is set, and the like.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A17601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 monitors the input from the Poden prize opening switch that detects a prize (ball) to the prize opening (Hoden prize opening) of the normal variation winning device 33. Is executed (A17602). In the second embodiment, unlike the prior art, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning award memory is stored according to the winning of the Poden prize hole. Therefore, the ordinary electric prize opening is included in the category of the first starting winning opening 36, and the ordinary electric prize switch is included in the category of the starting opening 1 switch 36a. The details of the ordinary prize winning switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100, if the universal figure game processing timer is not 0, updates -1 (subtracts only 1) (A17603). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the universal figure game processing timer has become 0 (A17604).

When the value of the universal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A17604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 sets the universal figure game processing number. The universal figure game sequence branch table referred to in order to branch to the corresponding process is set in the register (A17605).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the universal figure game processing number based on the set universal figure game sequence branch table (A17606). Then, a subroutine call is performed by the universal figure game process number to execute a game branch process corresponding to the universal figure game process number (A17607).

When the game process number is “0” in step A17607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the general figure fluctuation display game, and sets the fluctuation start of the general figure fluctuation display game and the effect settings, The ordinary figure normal process for setting information necessary for performing the ordinary figure changing process is executed (A17608). Details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 137.

Further, when the game process number is “1” in step A17607, the game control device 100 executes the general figure changing process for setting information necessary for performing the general figure displaying process ( A17609). The details of the processing for changing the universal figure will be described later with reference to FIG. 139.

If the game process number is “2” in step A17607 and the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the time saving state. Processing for displaying a general figure, such as setting of an opening time and setting of information necessary for performing the processing for hitting a general figure, is executed (A17610). Details of the process of displaying a general figure will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “3” in step A17607, the game control device 100 sets the information necessary for continuing the process for hitting the normal figure or performing the normal ball remaining ball process. The middle processing is executed (A17611). The details of the normal figure hitting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, when the game process number is "4" in step A17607, the game control device 100 executes the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process for setting the information necessary for performing the per-universal-game end process (A17612). ). The details of the universal figure remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 143.

Further, when the game process number is "5" in step A17607, the game control device 100 executes the universal figure per end process for setting the information necessary for performing the general routine process (A17608). (A17613). Details of the per-universal-drawing end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 144.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a universal figure variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbols by the universal figure display 53 (A17614). After that, the symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal symbol display 53 is executed (A17615), and the universal symbol game process is ended.

On the other hand, when the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not 0 (result of A17604 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A17614 and subsequent steps.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A17601 in the universal figure game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A17701). Then, if there is an input to the gate switch 34a (result of A17701 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game state is right-handed (A17702). Here, the gaming state to be hit right is a big hit state, a first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a third specific gaming state. If it is in the game state of hitting to the right (result of A17702 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A17705. If the game state is not right hitting (result of A17702 is "N"), a left hitting instruction notification command (left hitting instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A17703), and effect command setting processing is executed (A17704). The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handing instruction notification command executes a notification (warning) for instructing left-handing using the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 obtains the number of reserved universal figures and determines whether the number of reserved universal figures is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A17705). When the number of reserved universal figures is less than the upper limit value (the result of A17705 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the number of reserved universal figures by +1 (A17706), and corresponds to the number of reserved universal figures after the update. The address of the random number storage area is calculated (A17707). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of the RWM (A17708), the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (A17709), and the gate switch monitoring process is ended.

On the other hand, if there is no input to the gate switch 34a (result of A17701 is "N"), or if it is determined that the number of reserved universal figures is not less than the upper limit value, the gaming control device 100 (result of A17705 is " N"), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Prize winning prize switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the Poden winning prize switch monitoring processing (A17602) in the public figure game processing will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process. In addition, as described above, the ordinary prize winning opening switch is included in the category of the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 115).

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the universal figure is hit, that is, whether or not the universal figure variation display game is in the hit state and the normal variation prize winning device 33 is executing a predetermined number of opening operations. (A17801). If it is in the middle of hitting a normal figure (result of A17801 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special electric prize winning prize switch (A17802). If there is an input to the ordinary electric prize opening switch (result of A17802 is "Y"), the count number of the ordinary electric counter is updated by +1 (A17803).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the updated number of the general electric counter has reached the upper limit value (for example, 6) (A17804). When the count number reaches the upper limit value (result of A17804 is “Y”), the hit end pointer value (for example, 4 or 7) is loaded from the end point pointer area of the universal figure in the RWM, and the hit end pointer value is stored in the RWM. Is saved in the middle control pointer area (A17805).

Finally, the universal figure game processing timer is cleared (A17806), and the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring processing is ended. That is, when there is a prize winning of the upper limit or more in the hit state of the universal figure, the value of the end of hit is saved in the universal figure winning process control pointer area at that time, and the normal variation winning device 33 is closed. Therefore, the hit state of the universal figure ends in the middle.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is not hitting a universal figure (the result of A17801 is “N”), when it is determined that there is no input to the special electric prize opening switch (the result of A17802 is “N”) ), or when it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (result of A17804 is “N”), the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process is ended.

[Usually processing]
Next, details of the ordinary figure ordinary process (A17608) in the ordinary figure game process will be described. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the steps of the ordinary figure ordinary processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the universal figure reservation number is 0 (A17901). When the number of reserved figures is not 0 (the result of A17901 is "N"), the random number is loaded from the random number storage area per figure of RWM (for the number of reservations 1), and the random number storage area of symbols per figure of RWM is stored. The random number per design is loaded from (for the number of reservations 1), and the random number storage area per universal figure after loading (for the number of reservations 1) and the random number storage area per universal figure (for the number of reservations 1) are cleared to 0 (A17902 ). Furthermore, whether or not the probability that a hit result in the universal figure fluctuation display game is higher than normal is in high probability of regular figure (during high-probability state), that is, whether it is in a time-saving state (state of universal communication support). It is determined (A1793). Note that the probability of hitting a universal figure in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability of hitting a universal figure in the low probability is 0/251.

The game control device 100 sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal figure low probability when the normal figure high probability is not (the result of A17903 is “N”) (A17904). If it is during the high probability of universal figure (the result of A17903 is “Y”), the high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1) that is the lower limit determination value in the high probability of universal figure is set (A17905), and the process of step A17906 is executed. Move to processing.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A17906). It should be noted that the upper limit determination value here is common between the high probability of universal figure and the low probability of regular figure. If the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (result of A17906 is “Y”), that is, if there is no match, the process proceeds to step A17908. When the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (result of A17906 is “N”), it is determined whether the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A17907).

If the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A17907 is “Y”), that is, if the hit random number, the game controller 100 saves the deviation information in the hit flag area (A17908). Further, the deviation stop symbol number is set as the universal figure stop symbol number (A17909), the deviation symbol information is saved in the universal figure stop symbol information area (A17910), and the process proceeds to step A17914.

If the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A17907 is “N”), that is, in the case of hit, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (A17911), and the hit symbol random number is loaded. The corresponding hit stop symbol number is set (A17912), and the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A17913), and the process proceeds to step A17914. It should be noted that there may be several types of hit stop symbols, and in the present embodiment, there are three (1 per ordinary figure, 2 per ordinary figure, 3 per ordinary figure).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the universal symbol stop symbol area (A17914), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A17915), and shifts the random symbol storage area per universal symbol. (A17916) After clearing the vacant area after the shift to 0 (A17917), the number of universal figure reservations is updated by -1 (A17918).

That is, with the execution of the universal figure fluctuation display game relating to the oldest universal figure reservation number 1, the number of the universal figure reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are on hold after the universal figure reservation number 1 is advanced one by one. By this process, the values for the number of reserved figures of 2 in the random number storage area per figure to the number of retained figures of 4 in the random number storage area per figure are moved from the number of reserved figures of 1 in the random number storage area for 3 figures Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved universal figures of 4 in the random number storage area per universal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved universal figures is decremented by one.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A17919), sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the universal figure game processing timer area (A17920). For example, the variation time is divided into 500 msec with a probability of 200/256, 1500 msec with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 msec with a probability of 16/256. Then, the process shift setting process during normal figure change is executed (A17921), and the normal figure normal process ends. It should be noted that the general-university-changing-process transition setting process will be described later.

Further, when the number of reserved universal figures is 0 (result of A17901 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets “0” as a processing number for shifting to regular processing of regular figures (A17922). , The processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (A17923). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A17924), and the ordinary figure normal process is ended.

[Usage diagram change processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process during the universal figure change. The normal figure changing processing transition setting processing is executed in step A17921 in the normal figure normal processing shown in FIG. 137.

The game control device 100 first sets "1" as a processing number for shifting to the processing during fluctuation in universal figure (A18101), and saves the processing number in the universal figure game processing number area (A18102).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the universal figure variation display game (normal symbol 1 varying signal is on) in the test signal output data area (A18103), and the universal figure variation display game is varying. The changing flag indicating that is saved in the universal figure change control flag area (A18104). Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the blinking cycle timer of the universal figure display, is saved in the universal figure blinking control timer area (A18105), and the initial value (here Then, 0) is saved (A18106). After that, the process transition setting process during routine change ends.

[Processing during fluctuations in general]
Next, details of the routine figure changing process (A17609) in the routine figure game process will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process of changing the universal figure.

The game control device 100 first sets the process number to "2" as a setting process for shifting to the process for displaying general figure (A18301), and saves the process number in the general figure game process number area (A18302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the general figure display time (for example, 0.6 seconds), which is the display time of the result of the general figure variation display game on the general figure display, in the general figure game processing timer area (A18303). ..

Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of variation of the universal figure (normal symbol 1 varying signal is turned off) in the test signal output data area (A18304). Then, a stop flag indicating that the general/universal figure variation display game is stopped is saved in the general/universal figure variation control flag area (A18305), and the general/universal figure variation processing is ended.

[Processing during normal figure display]
Next, the details of the normal figure displaying process (A17610) in the normal figure game process will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process of displaying a general figure.

The game control device 100 first loads the hit flag (hit information or deviance information) set in the normal/general processing (A18401), and clears the hit flag area of the RWM (A18402). Then, it is determined whether or not hit information is set in the loaded hit flag (A18403).

When the hit information is set in the hit flag (result of A18403 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a hitting process setting table (A18404), and hits corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information. A start pointer value (here, a value corresponding to each of 1, 2, and 3 per drawing) is acquired and saved in the middle control pointer area per drawing (A18405). Further, the hit end pointer value (here, the value corresponding to each of 1, 2, and 3 per universal figure) corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the per universal figure end pointer area (A18406). Next, the universal communication open time (here, the value corresponding to each of 1, 2, and 3 per universal figure) corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (A18407). By the above processing, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 33 in the probability changing state or the time saving state (in the normal power support state) is set, and for example, it is possible to open three times or two times.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets "3" as the process number for shifting to the process of hitting a normal figure (A18408), and saves the process number in the figure game process number area (A18409). After that, the signal regarding the hit of the general figure fluctuation display game (normal symbol 1 hitting signal is turned on) and the signal regarding the start of normal electric operation (ordinary electric accessory 1 operating signal is on) are saved in the test signal output data area. (A18410). Further, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the general electric solenoid 33b, the on data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (A18411).

Further, the game control device 100 clears the information of the ordinary electric prize count area that stores the number of prizes to the ordinary variable prize device 33 (A18412), and determines the number of prizes to the ordinary variable prize device 33 during the irregularity monitoring period of the ordinary electric prize. The stored information on the number of illegal prize winning areas stored is cleared (A18413). Lastly, the flag defining the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 33 is saved in the normal communication fraud monitoring period flag area (A18414).

When the hit information is not set in the hit flag (result of A18403 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 sets “0” as a process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (A18415). , The processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (A18416). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area (A18417), and the process of displaying the universal figure ends.

[Purpose of medium processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure hitting process (A17611) in the normal figure game process will be described. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a process for hitting a normal figure.

First, the game control device 100 prepares by loading the control pointer during the universal figure hitting (A18601), and the value of the loaded control pointer during the universal figure hits is the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the universal figure (hit end). Value) is determined (A18602).

Then, the game control device 100, when the value of the control pointer during the universal figure hit does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the universal figure hit (the result of A18602 is "N"), the control during the universal figure hit The pointer is updated by +1 (A18603). Further, the ordinary electric power operation shift setting process is executed (A18604), and the ordinary figure hitting process is ended. The details of the normal power operation shift setting process will be described later.

Further, when the value of the control pointer during the universal figure hits the value in the upper limit area of the control pointer during the universal figure (the value of the end of hit) (the result of A18602 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100, In step A18603, the normal/universal figure hitting process control pointer area is not updated (+1), but the normal electric power operation shift setting process is executed (A18604), and the normal figure hitting normal process is ended.

[Normal power operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal power operation shift setting process (A18604) in the normal figure hitting process will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal power operation shift setting process. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for controlling the drive of the normal electric solenoid 33b for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 33, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer.

The game control device 100 first branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (A18701). Note that here, the control pointer uses the value before being updated in step A18603. If the value of the control pointer is 0, 2, or 5, the process proceeds to step A18702 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 33, and therefore, the normal variation winning device 33 corresponding to the control pointer. The wait time (for example, 300 msec) after the blockade is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (A18702).

Further, the game control device 100 sets off data in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 33b (A1873), and ends the normal power operation transition setting process.

When the value of the control pointer is either 1 or 3, the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A18704 to control the opening of the normal variation winning device 33, and therefore corresponds to the control pointer. The normal electric prize opening time (eg, 1700 msec), which is the opening time of the normal variation winning device 33, is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (A18704). Further, ON data is set in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn on the general electric solenoid 33b (A18705), and the general electric operation shift setting process ends.

When the value of the control pointer is 6, the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A18706 to control the opening of the normal variation winning device 33, and thus the normal variation winning device corresponding to the control pointer. The normal electric opening time (eg, 2600 msec), which is the opening time of 33, is saved in the general-university-game processing timer area (A18706). Further, ON data is set in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn on the general electric solenoid 33b (A18707), and the general electric operation shift setting process ends.

Furthermore, when the value of the control pointer is either 4 or 7, the game control device 100 proceeds to step A18708 to end the opening control of the normal variation winning device 33 and complete the ordinary electric ball processing ( In order to execute (A17612), "4" is set as the process number (A18708), and the process number is saved in the universal figure game process number area (A18709).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the normal electric ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the normal figure game processing timer area (A18710). After that, the OFF data is saved in the ordinary power solenoid output data area in order to set the ordinary power solenoid 33b to OFF (A18711), and the ordinary power operation transition setting process ends.

[Universal residual ball treatment]
Next, details of the normal electric ball remaining ball process (A17612) in the normal figure game process will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary electric remaining ball processing.

The game control device 100 first sets a process number "5" related to the end process for the universal figure (A18901), and saves the process number in the universal figure game process number area (A18902). Then, the universal figure ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (A18903).

Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of operation of the normal variation winning device 33 (normal electric auditor product 1 operating signal is off) in the test signal output data area (A18904). Subsequently, the ordinary electric count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 33 is cleared (A18905), and further, the control pointer area for hitting a normal figure is cleared (A18906). After that, the per-universal-diagram end pointer area is cleared (A18907), and the ordinary electric power remaining ball processing is ended.

[Usually end processing]
Next, details of the per-universal-drawing end processing (A17613) in the general-university game processing will be described. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the end processing per universal figure.

The game control device 100 first sets a process number "0" related to the normal/universal figure normal process (A19101), and further saves the process number in the general/universal figure game process number area (A19102). After that, the signal regarding the hit end of the general figure fluctuation game (normal symbol 1 hitting medium signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A19103).

Further, the game control device 100 saves a flag (a flag during the fraud monitoring period) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 33 in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A19104), and then ends the universal figure winning process. To finish.

[Operation and effect of the second embodiment]
Hereinafter, the operation and effect of the second embodiment will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a time chart of the operation of the first special variation winning device 38 in the small hit RUSH. In FIG. 145, in order to explain the operation of the first special variation winning device 38 in the second specific game state, the execution state and the stopped state of the special figure 2 variable display game (described as “special figure 2 game”), The execution state of the small hitting operation, the opening/closing state of the lower big winning opening (the winning opening of the first special variation winning device 38), and the state of the game ball near the opening/closing door of the lower large winning opening are shown.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment changes the sliding type opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c of the first special winning device 38 from a closed state to an open state when a small hit (first special game state) is generated. Convert. Then, the first special winning device 38 has a configuration in which the game balls are retained on the opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c when the opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c is closed. Further, when the opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c is in the open state, the game balls accumulated on the opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c can be won. As a result, even if the open state is short, a lot of game balls can be won by allowing the game balls retained in the open/close door (open/close member) 38c to win the first special winning device 38, In the specific game state, the number of payouts can be efficiently increased.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the above-mentioned small hit RUSH occurs in the second specific game state, the variation starts each time the second start winning port 37 is won. As shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 119, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 is set to be extremely high in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, and the special figure 2 is set in the second specific game state. The fluctuation of the fluctuation display game is set to short fluctuation. Therefore, the small hitting operation occurs one after another.

When a small hit occurs, the big winning hole is opened a plurality of times (e.g., eight times) for each small hit. During the small hitting operation (first special game state), the open state time of the lower special winning opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is set shorter than the closed state time. For example, the closing time of the lower special winning opening may be 1.2 seconds, while the opening time may be 0.2 seconds.

The special variation winning device unit that constitutes the first special variation winning device 38 has a configuration in which the downward force of the game ball on the opening/closing door 38c is weakened (see, for example, JP-A-2017-77362). As a result, the game balls are likely to stay on the opening/closing door 38c.

In such a configuration, when a small hit RUSH occurs in which a small hit occurs frequently, the closed state of the lower special winning opening is set to be longer than the open state. The game ball can be retained on the opening/closing door 38c. After that, since the opening/closing door 38c is opened, many game balls staying on the opening/closing door 38c will win the lower special winning opening at once. As a result, when the small hit RUSH occurs, a lot of prize balls can be given to the player.

By doing so, in the probability variation loop type gaming machine 10 as in the second embodiment, the small hit RUSH can be executed in the second specific gaming state after exiting the first specific gaming state. , A new game property can be realized in which the more balls fit, the more game balls can be acquired.

Describing with reference to FIG. 145, when a small hit occurs in a predetermined variable display game and a small hit occurs in the next variable display game of the predetermined variable display game, in the next variable display game, A period for securing the flow-down and retention state of the game ball can be secured by the variation period of the identification information. As a result, when the small hit operation continues for two games, the game ball can be retained on the opening/closing door 38c by utilizing the variable time of the subsequent game. Then, a large number of game balls retained on the opening/closing door 38c can be swiftly awarded to the lower special winning opening to give a large number of prize balls to the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment, when the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times in the first specific game state after the end of the big hit (second special game state), the small hit mode ( Since it is shifted to the second specific game state in which the first special result) can be derived, it is possible to perform a novel game state transition that has never been seen before. Further, according to the gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment, it is possible to efficiently change the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) in which many small hits are allocated.

[Third Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the same configuration as that of the second embodiment can be applied. It should be noted that the configurations that are not described in the second embodiment and the third embodiment are applicable to the configurations common to the first embodiment.

The third embodiment relates to a small hit production that notifies the occurrence of a small hit state. In particular, the small hit production includes a blessing presentation in which the occurrence of the small hit is celebrated and notified. It should be noted that the blessing effect does not include the display of the stop pattern for the small hit (stop display for the small hit) itself.

In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is the small hit result (small hit mode, first special result, first hit result), the small hit state (first special game state) occurs. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit result (big hit mode, second special result, second hit result), a game value (outgoing balls, number of balls won) that is more advantageous to the player than a small hit state is given. A jackpot state (second special game state) that can be given occurs.

The total opening time of the special winning opening is longer in the big hit state than in the small hit state, so in the big hit state (second special game state), the game is smaller than in the small hit state (first special game state). There are many game values (balls, number of balls to be acquired) that can be acquired by a player, and it is possible to give a game value that is more advantageous to the player than in the small hit state. In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the special winning opening is open, so in the present embodiment, the small hit state is called a first special game state, and the big hit state is called a second special game state. ..

In addition, in the small hit, a normal small hit (normal small hit) in which the small hit result of the main variable display game occurs, and an irregular small hit in which the small hit state occurs according to the small hit result of the subsidiary variable display game There is a hit. Further, the big hit includes a normal big hit in which a big hit state is generated according to the big hit result of the main variable display game, and an irregular big hit in which a big hit state is generated according to the big hit result of the subsidiary variable display game.

Here, the main variable display game is executed based on the game balls entering the main starting area (main area, main starting winning opening) where the game balls often enter, and the sub variable display game is It is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the sub-starting area (sub-area, sub-starting winning opening) in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the starting area. As in the first and second embodiments, the main variable display game and the sub variable display game can be in a running state (both simultaneously) (simultaneous variation is possible).

As described with reference to FIG. 116, in the normal game state (first game state), the first start winning opening 36 (first starting area) becomes the main starting area where game balls often enter, and the second starting prize. The mouth 37 (second starting area) becomes a sub starting area in which game balls are less likely to enter than the main starting area. Then, the main variable display game becomes the special figure 1 variable display game, and the sub variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game.

Further, as described with reference to FIG. 116, in the small hit RUSH state (second specific game state, second game state), the second start winning hole 37 (second start area) may enter the game ball. There are many main starting areas, and the first starting winning opening 36 (first starting area) is a sub starting area in which game balls are less likely to enter than the main starting area. Then, the main variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game, and the sub variable display game becomes the special figure 1 variable display game. The small hit RUSH state (second specific game state) has a high probability of hitting, and is a state in which there is no universal electric power support.

In the normal game state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is long-term variation (long variation, for example, 10 minutes), and it is recommended to enter the game ball into the first start winning opening 36. Then, the left hitting, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 36, is more advantageous and recommended for the player than the right hitting. In the normal game state, the display device 41 can display a left-handed display for recommending a left-handed player to the player (a display for recommending a game ball to enter the first start winning opening 36). It should be noted that the left-handed striking of the game ball toward the left side (first game area) of the game area 32 is called the first launch mode of the ball launching device (launching means), and the right side of the game area 32 (second game area). The right-handed striking is called the second launch mode of the ball launching device.

In the small hit RUSH state (small hit rush state), a small hit can be generated with an extremely high probability by winning the second start winning opening 37, so that the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 37. Recommended. Then, right-handing (second firing mode), which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 37, is more advantageous and recommended for the player than left-handing (first firing mode). In the small hit RUSH state, the display device 41 can display a right hit display for recommending a right hit to the player (a display recommending entry of a game ball into the second start winning opening 37).

Further, as described with reference to FIG. 116, in the first specific game state and the third specific game state, since the game control device 100 has the universal power support, the winning opening of the normal variation winning device 33 (the regular power prize). Mouth) is the main starting area where the game balls often enter, and the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 is the sub starting area where the game balls enter less than the main starting area. Become. Also, right-handed is more advantageous and recommended for the player than left-handed.

In the first specific game state and the third specific game state, the main variation display game is a special figure 1 variation display game that is executed based on a ball entering the Poden prize hole (main starting area) The display game is a special figure 1 variable display game that is executed based on the entry into the first starting winning opening 36 (subordinate starting area), or the entry into the second starting winning opening 37 (subordinate starting area) The special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on. In addition, the game control device 100 is information for determining whether the game is the special figure 1 variable display game executed based on which of the first start winning opening 36 and the ordinary electric winning opening. Including the information of whether the game ball is detected by the start opening 1 switch of the starting winning opening 36 or the Hoden winning opening switch) is included in the variation command (variation type command) or the decorative special figure 1 command (design type command), It may be transmitted to the performance control device 300.

In summary, in the normal game state (first game state), it is recommended that the game balls be inserted into the first start winning hole 36 (first starting area), and the first starting winning hole 36 becomes the main starting area. The second starting winning opening 37 (second starting area) becomes the sub starting area. In the small hit RUSH state (second game state), it is recommended that the game balls enter the second start winning hole 37, the second starting winning hole 37 becomes the main starting area, and the first starting winning hole 36 becomes It becomes the secondary starting area. In addition, in the first specific game state and the third specific game state, it is recommended that a game ball be inserted into the ordinary electric prize winning port of the ordinary variation winning device 33, and the ordinary electric prize hole becomes the main starting area. The first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 serves as a sub starting area.

The effect control device 300, the information of the hit command received most recently, the information of the symbol command received most recently (special figure type of B1801, symbol type of B1802), high support prescribed number of times (for example, 50 times), The low gaming support number of times (for example, 50 times), the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game after the end of the big hit, the probability information (B1313), etc., the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the small hit RUSH state, the first identification It is possible to determine whether it is the gaming state or the third specific gaming state. The current game state can be determined also from the normal mode, the probability variation mode, the time saving mode, the effect mode (B1318) such as the small hit RUSH mode.

Then, in the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 continuously displays the left-handed display 656 (described later) on the display device 41 while the current game state is the normal game state, and the current game state is a small hit. While the state, the big hit state, the first specific game state, the small hit RUSH state (the second specific game state), the third specific game state, the right hit display 658 (described later) is continuously displayed on the display device 41. indicate.

[Winning command processing]
FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit command processing according to the third embodiment. The production control device 300 executes the hit command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 92).

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). When the hit system command is the fanfare command (A5714, A5814) or the small hit fanfare command (A5735, A5835), the MODE section indicates the fanfare. It should be noted that the fanfare command includes information on the maximum number of rounds per jackpot. The upper limit number of rounds can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

When the MODE part of the hit system command indicates a fanfare (the result of B2101 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the hit system command is due to the irregular small hit, that is, the hit system command is It is determined whether or not it is a small hit fanfare command received due to occurrence of a regular small hit (B2102).

When the hit system command is not due to the irregular small hit (result of B2102 is “N”), effect control device 300 executes fanfare effect effect setting processing for setting fanfare effect (B2103). The fanfare effect is a small hit fanfare effect when a small hit fanfare command is received, or a big hit fanfare effect when a fanfare command is received. Then, the fan state is set in the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 (B2104), and the hit system command processing is ended.

In addition, as described above, the irregular small hit is a case where the result of the special figure variation display game started based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball to the sub starting area (sub area) is a small hit. A small hit. Further, the effect control device 300, for example, a small figure variation display game of a special figure type (for example, special figure 2) different from the main variation display game (for example, special figure 1 variable display game) corresponding to the current game state is a small hit. If it becomes, it can be determined as an irregular small hit.

On the other hand, if the hit system command is due to the irregular small hit (the result of B2102 is “Y”), effect control device 300 does not set the fanfare effect and does not execute the small hit fanfare effect, and executes step B2104. The process of is executed.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit command represents a round ( B2105). When the hit system command is the round command (A6102) or the small hit opening command (A6902, A6909, A6916, A6923), the MODE part indicates the round.

When the MODE part indicates a round (the result of B2105 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the hit system command is due to the irregular small hit, that is, the hit system command is the irregular small hit. It is determined whether or not the received command is a small hit opening command (B2106). When the hit system command is not due to the irregular small hit (the result of B2106 is “N”), the round effect setting process for setting the round effect is executed (B2107). The round effect is a small hit medium effect during the big win opening when a small hit is received when a small hit opening command is received, or a big hit round effect during a big hit round when a round command is received. .. Next, the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to "round" (B2108), and the hit command processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the hit system command is due to the irregular small hit (the result of B2106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 does not set the round effect and does not execute the small hit mid effect, and the step B2108. The process of is executed.

If the MODE part of the received hit system command does not represent a round (result of B2105 is “N”), the effect control device 300 asks the effect control device 300 whether the MODE part of the hit system command represents an interval. It is determined whether or not (B2109). If the hit command is an interval command, the MODE part indicates the interval. In the present embodiment, in the small hit, the special winning opening is opened only once (see FIG. 69 ), that is, since the small hit is one round, there is no interval command. However, even in the case of a small hit, the interval command exists in a configuration in which the big winning opening is opened and closed a plurality of times.

When the MODE part indicates an interval (the result of B2109 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the hit system command is due to the irregular small hit, that is, the hit system command is the irregular small hit. It is determined whether or not the command is received upon occurrence (B2110). When the hit system command is not due to irregular small hit (the result of B2110 is “N”), the interval effect setting process for setting the interval effect of the big hit (or the small hit) is executed, and the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10. During the interval is set to the game state flag indicating (P machine state) (B2111, B2112), and the hit system command processing is ended.

When the MODE part of the received hit system command does not represent the interval (the result of B2109 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit system command represents the ending ( B2113). When the hit system command is the ending command (A6307) or the small hit end screen command (A7001), the MODE part indicates the ending.

When the MODE part of the hit system command indicates the ending (the result of B2113 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the hit system command is due to the irregular small hit, that is, the hit system command is It is determined whether or not it is a small hit end screen command received due to occurrence of a regular small hit (B2114). When the hit system command is not due to the irregular small hit (result of B2114 is "N"), the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect is executed (B2115). The ending effect is a small hit ending effect at the end of the small hit (display effect of the small hit end screen) when the small hit end screen command is received, and a big hit ending at the end of the big hit when the ending command is received. It becomes an effect (display effect of the big hit end screen). The ending state is set to the game state flag indicating the current game state of the game machine 10 (P machine state) (B2116), and the hit system command processing is ended.

When the hit system command is due to the irregular small hit (the result of B2114 is "Y"), effect control device 300 does not set the small hit ending effect and does not execute the small hit end screen display effect. Then, the process of step B2116 is executed.

When the MODE part of the received hit system command does not indicate the ending (result of B2113 is “N”), production control device 300 ends the hit system command process without executing any process.

The above small hit fanfare effect, small hit medium effect, small hit interval effect, and small hit ending effect are collectively referred to as a small hit effect. The small hit production is an effect executed due to the small hit. In addition, the above big hit fanfare, big hit round, big hit interval, and big hit ending are collectively called big hit production.

FIG. 147A is a table exemplifying the presence or absence of a small hit effect and a big hit effect by such hit system command processing with respect to the normal game state (left hit state). FIG. 147B is a table exemplifying the presence or absence of a small hit effect and a big hit effect by the hit system command processing for the small hit RUSH state (right hitting state).

In the normal gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game is the subsidiary variable display game. In the small hit RUSH state, the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the main variable display game, and the special figure 1 variable display game becomes the subsidiary variable display game.

147A and 147B, in the first period, which is the display time of the stop symbol, when the result of the main variable display game is the small hit result, in the second period after the first period, the small hit effect (small The winning fanfare effect, small hit medium effect, small hit ending effect, etc.) are executed. On the other hand, when the sub variable display game result is the small hit result in the first period, the small hit effect is not executed in the second period after the first period. The second period is a continuous period of the small hit state.

Then, only when the result of the main variation display game is a small hit result (in the case of normal small hit), as a part of the small hit effect, a blessing effect for blessing and informing the occurrence of the small hit state is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the sub-variable display game is a small hit result (irregular small hit), the small hit effect is not executed, and thus the blessing effect is not executed. For this reason, the player can enjoy the game in an original way of enjoying (hit, launch mode) such as shooting a game ball aiming at the main starting area, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating.

In addition, if a blessing effect is executed in the case of an irregular small hit, the player tries to generate a large number of subsidiary variable display games, and hits the gaming ball aiming at the subsidiary starting area where entering the gaming ball is not recommended. While it is not possible to enjoy the game in the recommended original way of enjoying (how to hit, how to launch), many error notifications of how to hit (such as "Please hit left") occur. Therefore, if the blessing effect is executed in the case of irregular small hits, the interest in the game may be reduced.

147A and 147B, in the first period, which is the display time of the stop symbol, when the result of either the main variation display game or the sub-variation variation display game is the big hit result, the first period after the first period During the two periods, a big hit effect (big hit fanfare effect, big hit round effect, interval effect, big hit ending effect, etc.) is executed. The second period is the duration of the big hit state. The types of jackpots include jackpot 1 and jackpot 2 depending on the probability state after the jackpot and the number of rounds. For example, jackpot 1 and jackpot 2 may be a regular jackpot and a probability variation jackpot, respectively, and a 4R jackpot and a 16R jackpot (see FIG. 119). Then, different big hit effects (one big hit, two big hits) may be executed for each type of big hit.

147A and 147B, in the first period, which is the display time of the stop symbol, in the case where the result of one or both of the main variable display game and the sub variable display game is a disappointing result, the first period In the latter second period, the effect corresponding to the result of the loss is not executed. In this case, of the main variation display game and the subsidiary variation display game that can be in the running state at the same time (both) at the same time, if the other is forcibly stopped by the small hit result, The second period is at least the duration of the small hit state. When one of the main variable display game and the subsidiary variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of the big hit, the second period is at least the duration of the big hit state. When the results of both the main variable display game and the subsidiary variable display game are out-of-match results, the second period is a period from at least after the first period to the start of one of the variable display games.

In the examples of FIGS. 146 and 147 described above, in the case of an irregular small hit in which the sub-variable display game is a small hit, a small hit fanfare effect, a small hit medium effect, and an interval effect (the large winning opening is opened and closed a plurality of times). Only in the case), all the small hitting effects of the small hitting ending effect are not executed. However, at the time of irregular small hit, small hit fanfare production, small hit medium production, interval production, and small hit ending production that do not include blessing production (several) may be used for the duration of the small hit state. It is also possible to have a configuration such that it is executed during two periods. For example, if the small hitting ending effect does not include a blessing effect, even in the case of irregular small hits, only the small hitting ending effect of a relatively short time is executed to notify the small hit and the enjoyment of the game may be enhanced. it can.

In the examples of FIGS. 146 and 147, the big hit effect is executed even in the irregular big hit in which the sub variable display game is a big hit. However, in the irregular big hit, it is also possible to configure not to perform only the blessing effect that celebrates and notifies the occurrence of the big hit among the big hit effects (the big hit effects other than the blessing effect are executed).

Incidentally, in the third embodiment, unlike the first and second embodiments, the special figure 2 starting prize winning memory (special figure 2 starting memory) is configured to accumulate up to a predetermined number of 1 or more (for example, 4). 2 The special figure 2 start prize during the execution of the variable display game or during the big hit is not invalidated. Therefore, the special figure starting port 2 switch process, the special figure 2 normal process, and the fluctuation start information setting process are changed from the first and second embodiments as follows.

[Special figure starting port 2 switch processing]
FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port 2 switch processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure starting port 2 switch process (A2718) in the starting port switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 loads the number of times the starting port 2 signal is output, which is the number of times information regarding the number of winnings to the starting port 2 switch 37a is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 (A3001). Further, the loaded value of the number of output signals of the starting port 2 is updated by +1 (A3002), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (A3003).

When the output count does not overflow (result of A3003 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the start mouth 2 signal output count area of the RWM (A3004). On the other hand, when the output count overflows (result of A3003 is “Y”), the process of step A3005 is executed without executing the process of step A3004.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure suspension (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A3005). If the number of reserved special figures is not less than the upper limit (the result of A3005 is "N"), the special figure starting port 2 switch processing is ended.

When the special figure reservation number is less than the upper limit value (the result of A3005 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 information setting flag (A3006) and updates the special figure 2 reservation number by +1. Yes (A3007). The special figure 2 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including distribution of prefetch variation patterns).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reserved (A3008), and outputs the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process to the big hit random number storage area of RWM. Save to (A3009). Subsequently, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A3010), and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3011). Furthermore, a small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3012). Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage areas (variation pattern random number 1 storage area, variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) corresponding to the RWM ( A3013).

Next, the game control device 100 executes special figure reservation information determination processing (prefetch processing, pre-determination processing) for determining special figure reservation information (A3014), and the decoration special figure 2 reservation number indicating the special figure 2 reservation number. A command (decorative special figure 2 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3015), effect command setting processing is executed (A3016), and the special figure starting port 2 switch processing ends. In this way, when the second starting memory (special figure 2 starting memory) is generated, the decorative special figure 2 hold number command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

In the third embodiment, the special figure hold information determination process is also executed for the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory) generated based on the winning of the game ball into the second start winning opening 37. Become. Therefore, the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop design command) and pre-reading variation system command (pre-reading variation pattern command) for special figure 2 starting memory (special figure 2 reservation) is transmitted from game control control equipment 100 to production control control equipment 300. ..

[Special figure 2 daily processing]
FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special process 2 normal processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 normal process (A3311) in the special figure 2 game process. The process other than steps A3605a and A3605b is the same as the special process 2 normal process (FIG. 36) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

After the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3605), the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure reserved number command (decorative special figure 2 reserved number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved number as an effect command (A3605a). , Production command setting processing is executed (A3605b).

Therefore, in the third embodiment, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, a decoration special figure 2 hold number command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes fluctuation start information setting processing (A3707, A3807) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. Note that the processes other than steps A5021, A5022, and A5023 are the same as the fluctuation start information setting process (FIG. 50) of the first embodiment, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

When information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (result of A5017 is "N"), that is, when information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 hold number is updated by -1 ( (A5021), the contents of the random number storage area related to the special figure 2 variable display game are shifted (A5022), the empty area after the shift is cleared (A5023), and the variation start information setting process ends.

[Screen transition 1]
151A and 151B are an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series with respect to the third embodiment, and in the case of a normal small hit and an irregular small hit occur. Show.

151A is a display screen immediately before the special figure 1 variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game) which is the main variable display game in the normal game state is started. In the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen, the out-of-stop symbols “3, 4, 6” of the previous special figure 1 variable display game are displayed in large size. Further, in the variable display area 613 at the left end portion of the display screen, the out-of-stop symbols “3, 4, 6” of the previous special figure 1 variable display game are displayed small. In the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen, the special figure 2 variable display game (decorative special figure 2 variable display game), which is the subsidiary variable display game in the normal game state, is variably displayed.

Further, in (a), the first predetermined image 675 showing the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game is a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, The second predetermined image 676 indicating the execution state of the two-variation display game is a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (is changing). The second predetermined image 676 “◯” may blink as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol). On the first display portion 620 of the display screen, the special figure 1 hold display 620a (special figure 1) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 starting memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game). Four (1 start memory display) are displayed. Nothing is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. Further, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number "4", and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number "4". Further, since it is in the normal gaming state, a left hitting display 656 for recommending left hitting to the player is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

Subsequently, in (a), the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game which is the sub variable display game are both in a running state. Further, the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. It is a symbol "○" indicating that. The first predetermined image 675 "○" and the second predetermined image 676 "○" may blink as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).

Further, in (a), in the first display unit 620, each special figure 1 hold display 620a is moved to the display position of the adjacent special figure 1 hold display 620a (hold shift). Further, the special figure 1 hold display 620a located at the left end of the first display unit 620 is moved from the first display unit 620 to the hold exhausting area 640 (hold shift). The special figure 1 hold display 620a of the first display unit 620 is a start memory display (pre-change hold display) corresponding to the start memory related to the variable display game before execution, whereas the special view of the hold exhausted area 640 is displayed. The 1 hold display 620a is a start memory display (a changing hold display) corresponding to the start memory of the variable display game being executed. Further, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number "3", and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number "4".

The special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game is displayed in a plurality of modes (two modes) of a first display mode and a second display mode. Here, the first display mode is a mode in which the display mode is larger than the second display mode, and is displayed in a large size in the central portion of the display screen as the main display, and the second display mode is an edge of the display screen as the sub display. This is a display mode in which a portion (here, the left end portion) is displayed small. That is, the fluctuating decorative design is a large design in the first display mode and a small design in the second display mode. It should be noted that the first display mode may be a mode in which a decorative design is formed by characters, numbers, and a frame and is variably displayed, and the second display mode may be a mode in which a decorative design is formed by only numbers and variably displayed. ..

The special figure 2 variable display game, which is a dependent variable display game, is displayed as a sub-display on the right end of the display screen, which is smaller than the special figure 1 variable display game in the first display mode as the main display. That is, the fluctuating decorative pattern is a large symbol in the special figure 1 variable display game of the first display mode, and a small symbol in the special figure 2 variable display game. In the display mode (small symbol mode) of the special figure 2 variable display game, the decorative pattern (color and size) of the same type as the special figure 1 variable display game of the second display mode (sub display) (for example, only numbers) May be different), or a decorative pattern of the same size as the special display 1 variable display game of the second display mode (colors and shapes may be different), or the special display of the second display mode. Although the color is different from that of the variable display game shown in FIG. 1, the decorative pattern of the same shape (the size may be different) may be used. Here, the same size means that the vertical width and the horizontal width are the same, or that the points (pt) of the characters (numerals) of the decorative pattern are the same.

Then, in (c), the result of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, is the small hit result, and the small hit symbol (small hit stop symbol) "7, 6, 7" is derived and displayed on the display screen. Largely displayed as a large pattern at the top. The small hit here is a normal small hit. The small hit pattern "7, 6, 7" is first displayed in a large size in the central portion of the display screen corresponding to the first display mode (main display) of the special figure 1 variable display game, and then the small hit fanfare. It may be moved to the upper part of the display screen and displayed in a small size so as not to disturb the performance. Further, the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” is displayed small in the variable display area 613 at the left end portion of the display screen, corresponding to the second display mode (sub display) of the special figure 1 variable display game.

Since the result of the special variation display game, which is the main variation display game, is a small hit result, the special variation 2 variation display game, which is the subsidiary variation display game, is displayed in the variation display area 615 at the right end of the display screen. The result of removal, that is, the removal pattern "1, 6, 7" is forcibly stopped (forced stop).

Further, in (c), since it is a normal small hit, a small hit fanfare effect is executed in the center portion of the display screen as a small hit effect. As a part of the small hit fanfare effect, a congratulatory effect of blessing the occurrence of the small hit and informing "Congratulations on small hit" is executed in a character display. As the blessing effect, an effect in which a character appears and celebrates may be executed. Further, as the small hit fanfare effect, the entry of the "tiger mode" as the effect mode corresponding to the small hit state is notified as "tiger mode entry".

And since it is a small hit state, in order to recommend the player to hit the right side, the right hitting display 657 is displayed in the large mode (first mode, maximum mode) in the upper right of the display screen and the right hitting is performed. The display 658 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen in a small mode (second mode, minimum mode) different from the right-handed display 657. As will be described later, the right-handed display 657 and the right-handed display 658 are displayed on the display screen in the same manner even when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit result. However, it may be displayed in a different manner.

The first predetermined image 675 has a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. It is a symbol "x" indicating that. Nothing is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640.

Next, in (d), a small hit medium effect is executed in the center of the display screen as a small hit effect. The effect in the small hit is an effect corresponding to the effect mode “tiger mode”. In addition, the mode called "tiger mode" may be set as one mode of the normal game state after the end of the small hit, and since that mode continues, the mode name "tiger mode" is displayed on the edge or corner of the display screen. May be done. Although not shown, the small hit ending effect is executed at the end of the small hit state.

After that, in (e), the small hit state ends and the normal game state starts. The small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” displayed on the upper part of the display screen returns to the central part of the display screen and is enlarged and displayed large, and then starts changing. Then, the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game starts in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 613 by the main display and the sub display. At the same time, the special figure 2 variable display game which is the sub variable display game starts in the variable display area 615 at the right end portion of the display screen.

In the 1st display part 620, each special figure 1 reservation display 620a has moved to the display position of the left special figure 1 reservation display 620a (hold shift). Further, the special figure 1 hold display 620a located at the left end of the first display unit 620 is moved from the first display unit 620 to the hold exhaustion area 640 and displayed as a changing hold display (hold shift). Further, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number "2", and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number "3".

Further, in (e), the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (changing), and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure. The 2 variable display game is indicated by a symbol "○" indicating that it is being executed (is changing). The first predetermined image 675 "○" and the second predetermined image 676 "○" may blink as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol). Further, since the small hit state is over and the game is in the normal game state, a left hitting display 656 for recommending left hitting to the player is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

The following (f) is in the same state as (a), only the number of holdings is different.

After that, in (ki), the result of the special figure 2 variable display game which is the sub variable display game becomes the small hit result, and the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” is derived, and the variable display area at the right end of the display screen. It is displayed small at 615. On the other hand, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a dependent variable display game, becomes a small hit result, so that in the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen and the variable display area 613 at the left end, the main variable display game A certain special figure 1 variable display game is disengaged result (specific result), that is, it is forcibly stopped by the disengagement symbol "1, 5, 6" (forced stop). The outlier symbol as the identification result of the variable display game is a symbol other than the small hit symbol and the large hit symbol, and includes the chance symbol symbol and the default symbol. The default design is a predetermined design (such as "1, 2, 3"). The chance eye pattern is a special outlier pattern that can be displayed as a result of a plurality of variable display games in the continuous notice as the look-ahead effect.

Further, in (K), the deviating symbols “1, 5, 6” corresponding to the deviating result (specific result) of the main variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) are displayed in the center part of the display screen in the sub variable display. It is displayed larger than the small hit pattern "7, 6, 7" corresponding to the small hit result (first special result) of the game (special figure 2 variable display game). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing whether the main variation display game has resulted in a small hit. The main variable display game is frequently executed, but when the sudden small hit result (small hit pattern) of the sub variable display game which is not frequently executed is conspicuously displayed, it is displayed in a large conspicuous manner. There is a possibility that the player may mistakenly recognize the main variation display game as if it had a small hit result. It should be noted that the small hit pattern has a regularity of the numbers (here, the two symbols "7" are aligned), but it is difficult to understand the difference from the off symbol, so the main variation display game is small even though it is the off symbol. It is easy to misunderstand that it was a hit.

Further, in (K), unlike (C), since it is an irregular small hit, the small hit effect is not executed including the blessing effect in which the occurrence of the small hit is celebrated and notified. In addition, the small hit production does not include the display itself of the small hit design (small hit stop design) "7, 6, 7". Since the blessing effect is not executed due to the irregular small hit, the player enjoys the game in the recommended original way of enjoying, that is, the left hitting or the right hitting, which is aimed at the main starting area (shooting mode). Like

The first predetermined image 675 has a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. It is a symbol "x" indicating that. Nothing is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640.

Then, in (K), since it is a small hit state, in order to recommend the player to hit the right side, only the right hitting display 658 is displayed in a small mode (second mode) in the lower right corner of the display screen. To be done. The right hit display 657 (first mode) is not displayed. Further, when the small hit state due to the irregular small hit occurs in this way, the right hit display 658 is more conspicuous than the right hit display 657 (first mode) in the big hit state as described in (U) below. It is displayed in a mode that does not exist (small mode). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the main variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) displayed in a large size in the first display mode causes a small hit and causes the player to mistakenly think that a right-handed state has occurred.

Also, in the case of such an irregular small hit, a display having the same content as that in the case where the main variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is out of alignment is displayed on the display device (see FIG. ) (See also). As a display of the common contents, the special figure 1 hold display 620a, the special figure 1 hold number display 650, the special figure 2 hold number display 660, the special figure 1 variable display first predetermined image 675 showing the execution state of the game, the special figure 2 There is a second predetermined image 676 showing the execution state of the variable display game.

In addition, as a display of the common content, although not shown, there is a character that appears at the time of temporary stop of the pseudo continuous effect (at the time of displaying the pseudo continuous symbol). In addition, the pseudo continuous effect is a pseudo variation in which the decoration special symbol that is variably displayed is pseudo temporarily stopped (pseudo stop display) from the start to the end of one special figure variation display game, It is an effect that is continuously performed a predetermined number of times. In addition, in the temporary stop display, a pseudo continuous symbol that suggests continuation of the pseudo continuous effect is stopped and displayed.

By the display of the above common contents, even if a small hit state occurs in the sub variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game), the player frequently appears in the main variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). Since the same display as when the result of () is seen is not felt, there is less discomfort and it is less likely to be confused by the small hit state due to the sudden variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game).

Further, in (K), a special figure 1 hold display 620a, which is a start memory display corresponding to the start memory that is the right to execute the main variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game), is displayed on the display screen. Therefore, even when the result of the subsidiary variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is the small hit result, the start memory display for the main variable display game can be continuously displayed on the display device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the start memory display for the sub variable display game is displayed on the display device and is confused in response to the result of the sub variable display game being a small hit result.

After that, in (h), the small hit state of the irregular small hit ends and the normal game state starts. The hold shift is executed, and the outlier symbols “1, 5, 6” displayed at the center of the display screen start to change. Then, the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game starts in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 613 by the main display and the sub display. At the same time, the special figure 2 variable display game which is the sub variable display game starts in the variable display area 615 at the right end portion of the display screen.

In addition, the game control device 100, the time from the start of the irregular small hit state of (ki) of FIG. 151 to the start of the normal game state of (h) (start of next variation) (irregular small hit digestion time). ) Is longer than the time (normal small hit digestion time = normal small hit digestion time) from the start of the normal small hit state of (c) to the start of the normal game state of (e) (start of next fluctuation) You may set it. That is, the irregular small hit digestion time=normal small hit digestion time+α. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player of occurrence of an irregular small hit, which is an unintended (not recommended) small hit, by using the extra time α.

In addition, the normal small hitting digestion time is the small hitting fanfare time (A6003a, A6003b), the small hit opening time (A6906, etc.), the small hit remaining ball processing time (A7006, etc.), and the small hit ending time (A7104, A7107). ) Is the total. For example, in the case of an irregular small hit, by adding a process for saving the time α to the special figure game processing timer area in the small hit ending process (FIGS. 72 and 73), the normal small hit digestion time is added. It is possible to make the irregular small hit digestion time by adding a different time α. Note that the normal small hitting digestion time is the time during the small hitting state, but the extra time α is the time from the end of the small hitting state to the start of the next fluctuation.

Although the game control device 100 transmits information (a signal regarding the start of the small hit) indicating that the small hit itself has occurred to the external information terminal 71 when the irregular small hit occurs (A6004a, A6004b), it is redundant. At a certain time α, two types of information, that is, information indicating that a small hit has occurred and information indicating that the small hit is irregular may be transmitted to the external information terminal 71 again. For example, in the small hit end process (FIGS. 72 and 73), by executing the process of saving the above two types of information in the external information output data area, the two types of information can be stored in the external information in the extra time α. It can be sent to the terminal 71. In this way, the information indicating that the small hit is irregular, that is, the irregular small hit is provided to the external device (such as the data display or the hall computer provided in the gaming machine 10) via the external information terminal 71. It is possible to notify that an irregular small hit, which is a small hit, has been sent by transmitting information indicating that the small hit has occurred. In the extra time α, only the information indicating that the small hit is irregular may be transmitted to the external information terminal 71.

Further, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number "1", and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number "2". Further, since the small hit state is over and the game is in the normal game state, a left hitting display 656 for recommending left hitting to the player is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

Subsequent (K) is in the same state as (A) and (F), only the number of reservations is different.

After that, in (K), the result of the special variation 1 variable display game, which is the main variation display game, becomes the big hit result, and the big hit symbol (big hit stop symbol) “3, 3, 3” is derived, and is displayed in the center of the display screen. Largely displayed as a large design. The big hit here is a normal big hit. In addition, the big hit symbol “3, 3, 3” is displayed small in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen in correspondence with the second display mode (sub display) of the special figure 1 variable display game.

The result of the special variation 1 variation display game that is the main variation display game is a big hit result, and the variation result of the special variation 2 variation display game that is the subsidiary variation display game, that is, the variation symbol “9, 2, 6 It is forcibly stopped by "(Forced stop).

Further, in (K), a big hit fanfare effect is executed as a big hit effect in the central portion of the display screen. As a part of the jackpot fanfare production, a blessing production is performed in which a congratulation is given to the occurrence of the jackpot and "Congratulations to the jackpot!" In addition, the blessing effect that the character appears and celebrates may be executed in the case of the normal small hit (c), but the blessing effect of the big hit that the character appears and celebrates is normally small. It may be executed in the same manner as in the case (c) or in a different manner. In addition, if it is different, the big hit and the small hit are clearly distinguished, and if it is the same, the blessing effect becomes common and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

And since it is a big hit state, in order to recommend the player to hit the right side, the right hitting display 657 is displayed in a large mode (first mode, maximum mode) in the upper right of the display screen, and right hitting display 658 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen in a small mode (second mode, minimum mode) different from the right-handed display 657.

Further, the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. It is a symbol "x" indicating that. Nothing is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640.

Subsequently, in (S), a big hit round effect is executed in the central portion of the display screen as a big hit effect.

Incidentally, in the normal small hit or normal big hit of the main fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) of (C) and (U) of FIG. 151A described above, in the fluctuation display area 615 at the right end of the display screen, the subsidiary fluctuation display is performed. The game (special figure 2 variable display game) is out of order (forcibly stopped at "1, 6, 7" "9, 2, 6" (forced stop). However, normal small hit of the main variable display game and In the normal big hit, the sub variable display game may be interrupted by interrupting the measurement of the change time by the timer, in which case the derivation of the result of the sub variable display game is postponed, but the small hit state or the big hit During the state, the sub variable display game in the variable display area 615 may be apparently continued due to fluctuations, etc. After the small hit state, measurement of the variation time by the timer is restarted for the sub variable display game. ..

Similarly, in the irregular small hit of the sub variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) of (ki) in FIG. 151A, in the variable display area 610 at the center and the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen. The main variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is forcibly stopped by the disengagement symbol ("1, 5, 6") (forced stop). However, the main variable display game may be interrupted by interrupting the measurement of the variable time by the timer. In this case, although the derivation of the result of the main variable display game is postponed, the main variable display game in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 613 may be apparently continued due to shaking fluctuation during the small hit state. In addition, after the small hit state, the measurement of the variation time by the timer is restarted for the main variation display game.

As the first display mode of the main fluctuation display game during the interruption (during the small hit state of the subordinate fluctuation display game) in the fluctuation display area 610, a mode in which a swing fluctuation (temporary stop) is performed with a large symbol, or a large symbol is used. Although there is a mode in which the rotation is changed, scrolling before the interruption (fluctuation in the vertical direction of the display screen) may be continuously performed during the interruption. As the second display mode of the main variable display game during the interruption (during the small hit state of the subordinate variation display game) in the variable display area 613, there is a mode in which the swing variation and the rotation variation are performed by the small symbol, but the interruption is performed. The previous scrolling mode may be continuously performed during the interruption.

Note that, in the first specific game state and the third specific game state of FIG. 116, even when a normal small hit and an irregular small hit occur, it is basically the same as in FIGS. 151A and 151B, and the main variation display The special figure 1 variable display game which is a game is displayed in two modes, a first display mode (main display) of the variable display region 610 and a second display mode (sub display) of the variable display region 613. The special figure 2 variable display game which is the sub variable display game is displayed in the variable display area 615 at the end of the display screen. In the first specific game state and the third specific game state, since the normal electric prize winning port of the normal variation winning device 33 is the main starting area, the ball enters the first starting winning hole 36 (secondary starting area). Even if the special display 1 variable display game executed based on is a small hit, it is an irregular small hit, but in that case, the small hit effect (including the blessing effect) is not executed. For example, assuming that (c) and (d) are irregular small hits instead of normal small hits, the character display "tiger mode rush", "small hit congratulations", "tiger mode", or a large right hit The display 657 is not displayed, and the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” in the main display may not be displayed.

[Another example 1 for irregular small hits]
FIG. 152 is a diagram showing another example 1 of irregular small hits.

FIG. 152 (ta) is a continuation of FIG. 151A (f), and the result of the special variation 1 variable display game, which is the main variation display game, is an outlier result, and the variation display area 610 at the center of the display screen shows The off symbol "8, 4, 3" is displayed. Further, in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the out-of-stop symbol “8, 4, 3” of the special figure 1 variable display game is also displayed small. The first predetermined image 675 has a symbol “X” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, and the second predetermined image 676 indicates that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. The symbol is "○". The second predetermined image 676 “◯” may blink as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).

Subsequently, (H) is the same as (A) of FIG. 151A except that the number of reservations is different. The special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current number of the special figure 1 hold "1", and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current number of the special figure 2 hold "3".

After that, in (T), the result of the special variation 1 variable display game, which is the main variation display game, becomes a deviation result, and the deviation pattern “2, 5, 1” is displayed in the fluctuation display area 610 at the center of the display screen. Has been done. Also, in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the out-of-stop symbol “2, 5, 1” of the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed small. Others are the same as in (T).

Subsequently, (TE) is the same as (H), except that the number of holdings is different. The special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number “0”, and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number “3”.

Thereafter, in (g), an irregular small hit occurs, as in (g) of FIG. 151B. (G) is the same as (G) except that the number of reservations is different.

Next, in (na), the small hit state of the irregular small hit ends and the normal game state starts. However, since the current number of the special figure 1 hold is “0”, unlike the case of (H) in FIG. 151B, the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game has the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 613. It does not start on both sides, but the state where the dislodged symbols “1, 5, 6” are stopped and displayed at the center portion and the left end portion of the display screen is maintained. However, the special figure 2 variable display game which is the sub variable display game starts in the variable display area 615 at the right end portion of the display screen.

Further, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number "0", and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number "2". Further, since the small hit state is over and the game is in the normal game state, a left hitting display 656 for recommending left hitting to the player is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

Note that, similarly to the above and FIG. 151, the game control device 100 moves from the start of the irregular small hit state of (g) of FIG. 152 to the start of the normal game state of (na) (start of the next variation). The time (irregular small hit digestion time) is the time from the start of the normal small hit state of (c) of FIG. 151 to the start of the normal game state of (e) (start of next fluctuation) (that is, the normal small hit). It may be set longer than the hit digestion time and the normal small hit digestion time). That is, the irregular small hit digestion time=normal small hit digestion time+α. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player of occurrence of an irregular small hit, which is an unintended (not recommended) small hit, by using the extra time α.

[Another example of irregular small hits 2]
FIG. 153 is a diagram showing another example 2 of irregular small hits. Another example 2 of irregular small hits corresponds to a case where (ki) in FIG. 151B is replaced with (ki-1) to (ki-4) in FIG. 153.

153 (ki-1) of FIG. 153 is the same as (ki) of FIG. 151B, but the result of the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is the small hit result, and the small hit symbol "7, 6," 7” is derived and displayed small in the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen. On the other hand, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) becomes a small hit result, the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) is displayed in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen. Outcome result (specification result), that is, forcibly stopped by the small outcome pattern "1, 5, 6" in the sub display (second display mode) (compulsory stop). In the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen, the result of deviation (specific result) of the special figure 1 variable display game, that is, the large deviation pattern “1, 5, 6” in the main display (first display mode) Is not displayed.

As described above, when the result of the sub-variable display game is an irregular small hit that results in a small hit result, the main variable display game is ended and the main variable display game is set as the disengagement result. It is not displayed in the (large mode), and is displayed on the display screen in the second display mode (small mode). Therefore, in the case of irregular small hits, there is no erroneous recognition that the main variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) that is largely displayed in the main display has a small hit result.

The main variable display game is frequently executed, while the sub variable display game is rarely executed and is changed for a long time, so that a small hit is rare. Since it is difficult to understand the difference between the small hitting pattern and the outlying pattern, it is easy to erroneously recognize that the main variation display game has become the small hitting despite the outlying pattern. Therefore, in the case of irregular small hits, the player may mistakenly recognize that the main variation display game, which was displayed in a large and conspicuous manner, has a small hit result.

The main variable display game may be interrupted by the irregular small hit by interrupting the measurement of the variation time by the timer, but during the interruption in the variable display area 613 (the small variation state of the sub variable display game). As the mode (second display mode) of the main fluctuation display game of (medium), a mode of swinging fluctuation (temporary stop) with a small symbol, a mode of rotating with a small symbol, or the same scroll as before apparent interruption is performed. There are modes and the like.

Subsequently, (ki-2) is a display screen when the small hit state of the irregular small hit ends and the normal game state starts. A left hit display 656 for recommending left hits to the player is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. In addition, the sliding-screen hidden images 651a and 651b capable of hiding other images appear while moving so as to be closed.

Further, as the hold shift is executed, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current number 1 of the special figure 1 hold, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 shows the current special figure 2 hold. The number "2" is displayed. Further, the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. It is a symbol "○" indicating that.

It should be noted that the small small hitting pattern “7, 6, 7” at the right end portion of the display screen and the small out-of-contact design “1, 5, 6” at the left end portion are preferentially higher than the concealed images 651a and 651b in the upper layer (front side). ), the concealed images 651a and 651b deviate from the small hit symbol "7,6,7" and the symbol "1,5,6" is not concealed, but may be concealed. Further, the hidden images 651a and 651b include the special figure 1 reserved display 620a, the reserved digestion area 640 (including the variable pending display), the special figure 1 reserved number display 650, the special figure 2 reserved number display 660, the first predetermined image 675, Although the second predetermined image 676 is not hidden, any one or a plurality of these may be hidden.

Then, immediately after (Ki-3), the fusible hidden images 651a and 651b are completely closed, and the two hidden images 651a and 651b are in contact with each other. In the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, changes in the sub display (second display mode). In the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen, the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the subsidiary variable display game, changes in a small manner.

Note that the sliding-screen hidden images 651a and 651b are preferentially displayed on the upper layer (front side), and the special display 1 variable display game of the main display is displayed on the lower layer (rear side). -Shaped concealment images 651a and 651b conceal the special display 1 variable display game in the main display (concealment effect). Therefore, in the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen, the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game is not displayed in the main display (first display mode). Since it is inconspicuous, it is not necessary to hide the special figure 1 variable display game (sub-display) in the left end variable display area 613 and the special figure 2 variable display game in the right end variable display area 615.

Then, in (Ki-4) immediately after, the sliding-screen-shaped concealed images 651a and 651b are opened and displayed at intervals, and the special display 1 variable display of the main display is made from the gap between the two concealed images 651a and 651b. A part of the game is displayed and can be seen. As a part of the special figure 1 variation display game, the variation display of the middle symbol “5” of the outlier symbols “1, 5, 6” that have started variation is displayed.

After that, (K) in FIG. 153 is the same as (B) in FIG. 151B, but the fusiform hidden images 651a and 651b are completely opened and erased. Then, the whole special figure 1 variable display game of the main display is displayed and can be visually recognized.

When the variation starts suddenly from (K-1) like (H), the off symbol "1, 5, 6" on the main display suddenly appears and the variation starts, so that the player feels uncomfortable. .. However, in (ki-2) to (ki-4) of FIG. 153, after the small hit state due to the irregular small hit, the sliding-shaped concealed images 651a and 651b are changed to the special figure 1 of the main display immediately after the start. By executing the concealment effect for concealing the display game, the player's discomfort is reduced.

Further, in (ki-1), a predetermined image may be displayed before the hidden images 651a and 651b in a sliding shape are displayed. For example, the predetermined image is a character image (for example, "Irregular!") that informs that it is an irregular small hit, or that a normal game (special figure variation display game) stops, that is, a small hit occurs. By doing so, a character image (for example, "please wait for a while!") may be displayed to inform that the progress of the normal game will be delayed. Even in this case, the player's discomfort is reduced.

[Another example 3 of irregular small hits (switching effect 1)]
FIG. 154 is a diagram showing another example 3 (switching effect 1) of irregular small hit. Another example 3 of irregular small hits corresponds to a case in which (key-1) to (key-4) in FIG. 153 are replaced with (key-a) to (key-d) in FIG. 154.

154 (key-a) is the same as (ki) in FIG. 151B or (ki-1) in FIG. 153, but unlike (ki) (ki-1), the main display is displayed at the center of the display screen. As the (first display mode), the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” of the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is displayed large. Also, in addition to the right-handed display 658 in the small aspect (second aspect) of the lower right corner of the display screen, it corresponds to the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” that is largely displayed in the central portion of the display screen. Then, the right-handed display 657 in the large mode (first mode, maximum mode) is displayed at the upper right of the display screen.

Subsequently, (key-b) is the same as (key-2) in FIG. 153, but unlike (key-2), by the sliding-gate hidden images 651a and 651b that appear while moving to close, The large small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” on the main display (first display mode) is hidden.

Subsequently, (key-c) immediately after is the same as (key-3) in FIG. 153, but the main display (first display mode) is small due to the completely closed fusible hidden images 651a and 651b. The hit pattern "7, 6, 7" is completely hidden.

Then, in the immediately following (key d), the sliding door-shaped concealed images 651a and 651b are opened and displayed at intervals, and the special display 1 variable display of the main display is made from the gap between the two concealed images 651a and 651b. A part of the game is displayed and can be seen. Here, as a part of the special display 1 variable display game of the main display, the variable display of the middle symbol “5” of the outlier symbols “1, 5, 6” that have started the variation is displayed.

In addition, when the fluctuation starts suddenly from (key a) like (h), a big small hit symbol "7, 6, 7" of the main display of the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) suddenly appears. Since the main display of the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) is changed to the off symbol "1, 5, 6" to start the variation, the player feels uncomfortable. However, in (key-b) to (key-d) of FIG. 154, after the small hit state due to the irregular small hit, the sliding-shaped hidden images 651a and 651b are changed to the special figure 1 of the main display immediately after the start. By executing the concealment effect for concealing the display game, the player's discomfort is reduced.

In addition, this concealment effect is a deviation symbol "1, 5, 6" as a deviation result (specific result) of the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game), and a special figure 2 variable display game (sub variable display game). ) Is a switching effect (switching effect 1) for switching and displaying the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” as the small hit result (first special result) on the display screen. In the case of irregular small hits, you can switch from the small hit result of the subsidiary variable display game to the outlier result of the main variable display game by the switching effect, and start the main variable display game, so there is continuity of display and less discomfort. Become.

[Another example of irregular small hits 4 (switching effect 2)]
FIG. 155 is a diagram showing another example 4 (switching effect 2) of irregular small hit. Another example 4 of irregular small hits corresponds to the one in which (K) in FIG. 151B is replaced with (K-1) to (K-5) in FIG. 155.

In (ki) of FIG. 155, a small hit state occurs due to an irregular small hit.

In (K-1) of FIG. 155, the first switching effect is executed immediately after the small hit state occurs. The first switching effect is the special display 1 variation display game (main variation display game) main display outliers "1, 5, 6", the special figure 2 variation display game (subvariable display game) small hit symbol " Switch to 7, 6, 7” to display the main display.

In (H-1), the effect control device 300 determines that the special figure 1 hold display 620a and its holding exhausted area 640, and the outlier symbol 655a “1, 5, 6 of the special figure 1 change display game (main change display game)”. Is attached to one side surface 652a of the rectangular parallelepiped object which is a 3D object (three-dimensional object) and is displayed on the display screen by the perspective method. In addition, the production control device 300 sets the special figure 2 hold display 630a and its holding exhaustion area 640, and the small hit pattern 655b “7, 6, 7” of the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) to a rectangular parallelepiped object. The side surface 652a is attached so as to be attached to the side surface 652b on the right side of the side surface 652a, and is displayed on the display screen by the perspective method. The upper and lower surfaces of the rectangular parallelepiped of the rectangular parallelepiped object are squares, and the four sides are the same rectangle. Further, the rectangular parallelepiped object is drawn by the two-point perspective drawing as a perspective method.

Then, the effect control device 300 displays the rectangular parallelepiped object so as to rotate in the positive direction around the vertical center axis of the rectangular parallelepiped. Initially, only the side surface 652a of the rectangular parallelepiped object is displayed so that only the deviating pattern 655a "1, 5, 6" can be visually recognized, but the display is such that the rectangular parallelepiped object is rotated so that the side surface 652a moves to the left back side. Do (rotate in the forward direction). When the rectangular parallelepiped object is displayed to rotate, the small hit pattern 655b “7,6,7” on the side surface 652b is displayed, and finally, only the small hit pattern 655b “7,6,7” is visually recognized. Only the side surface 652b is displayed so that it can. In this way, by the first switching effect, the off symbol design 655a "1, 5, 6" is switched to the small hit symbol 655b "7, 6, 7" by utilizing the rotation display of the 3D object.

In addition, the first switching effect is, as shown in (H-1), the stop state of the decorative design (the deviating design "1, 5, 6" during the stop and the small hitting design "7, 6, 7" during the stop) It is not necessary to be executed in the state), and may be executed during the fluctuation immediately before the decoration pattern stops. In this case, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (sub variable display game) that are changing are executed within the side surface 652a and the side surface 652b of the rectangular parallelepiped object, respectively. Then, as the side surface 652a and the side surface 652b move due to the rotation of the rectangular parallelepiped object, the display position of the variable display (variable display area) also moves.

Further, in the right-handed state (small hitting state) in which (K-1) right-handedness is recommended, when the player left-handedly hits, the right-handed display 657 that causes the right-handed hit to return to a right-handed manner is a large mode (first 1 aspect) is displayed on the display screen. In that case, the right-handed display 657 may be additionally displayed so as to be pasted on the surface (side surfaces 652a, 652b) of the rectangular parallelepiped object, or may be displayed outside the side surfaces 652a, 652b regardless of the rectangular parallelepiped object. May be displayed in. When the display is off the side surfaces 652a and 652b, the right-handed display 657 is partially displayed outside the display area of the side surfaces 652a and 652b, and the other part extends to both the display areas of the side surfaces 652a and 652b. As described above, the display areas may be overlapped and displayed on the display areas of the side surfaces 652a and 652b.

As described above, due to the irregular small hit, the main variable display game is interrupted by interrupting the measurement (clocking) of the variable time by the timer (the derivation of the result of the main variable display game is postponed). Alternatively, the main variable display game being interrupted may be displayed as a specific mode in which it is attached to the side surface 652a. Specific modes of the main fluctuation display game include a mode in which swinging fluctuations (temporary stop) are performed within the side surface 652a, and a mode in which the inside of the side surface 652a is moved by a straight or curved scroll. It should be noted that after the small hit state, the measurement (timekeeping) of the variation time by the timer for the main variation display game is restarted, and the main variation display game is restarted.

Subsequently, in (K-2), in the small hit state after the end of the first switching effect, the small hit symbol "7, 6, 7" of the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is mainly displayed ( It is displayed in the first display mode). Further, in the second display unit 630, the special figure 2 hold display 630a (special figure 2 start memory display) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory) which is the right to execute the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed. Is displayed. Nothing is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. Further, a right hit display 657 and a right hit display 658 are displayed.

After that, in (K-3), when the variation of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is about to start in the normal game state immediately after the end of the small hit state, the right hit display 657 and the right hit display are performed. The display 658 disappears and the left-handed display 656 is displayed.

Subsequently, in (H-4), the second switching effect is executed while the fluctuations of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are started. In the second switching effect, the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” of the special map 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) and the main display off symbol “7, 6, 7” of the special map 1 variable display game (main variable display game) Switch to 1, 5, 6” to display the main display. The second switching effect may be performed during the small hit state instead of the normal game state after the small hit state.

In the second switching effect, the effect control device 300 displays the above-mentioned rectangular parallelepiped object so as to rotate in the opposite direction to the first switching effect around the central axis of the rectangular parallelepiped in the vertical direction. Initially, only the side surface 652b of the rectangular parallelepiped object is displayed so that only the small hit symbol "7, 6, 7" can be visually recognized, but the rectangular parallelepiped object is rotated so that the side surface 652b moves to the right back side. Do (rotate in the opposite direction). When the rectangular parallelepiped object is displayed to rotate, the small hitting pattern 655a "1, 5, 6" on the side surface 652a is displayed, and finally, only the small hitting pattern 655a "1, 5, 6" is visually recognized. Only the side surface 652a is displayed so that it can. In this way, the small switching symbol 655b “7,6,7” is switched to the detached symbol 655a “1,5,6” by utilizing the rotation display of the 3D object by the second switching effect.

It should be noted that the second switching effect does not need to be executed during the change of the decorative pattern as in (K-4), and the stopped state of the decorative pattern before the start of the change (the falling pattern "1, 5, 6 during the stop") ] And the small hitting symbols “7, 6, 7” that are stopped) may be executed. In this case, the stop display (stop pattern) of the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (sub variable display game) has a side surface 652a and a side surface 652b respectively due to rotation of the rectangular parallelepiped object. The display position moves as it moves.

Further, in the left-handed state (normal game state) in which the left-handed (K-4) is recommended, when the player makes a right-handed hit, in addition to the left-handed hit display 656, the left-handed hit is returned. The hit display is displayed on the display screen in a large manner. For example, in a large left-handed display, the characters in the right-handed display 657 may be changed to “left-handed” and the arrow direction may be reversed. In that case, the left-handed display may be additionally displayed so as to be pasted on the surface (side surfaces 652a, 652b) of the rectangular parallelepiped object, or may be removed from the side surfaces 652a, 652b regardless of the rectangular parallelepiped object and displayed on the display screen. It may be displayed. When the left-handed display is displayed off the side surfaces 652a and 652b, part of the left-handed display is displayed outside the display area of the side surfaces 652a and 652b, and the other part is displayed across both the display areas of the side surfaces 652a and 652b. May be displayed in an overlapping manner on the display areas of the side surfaces 652a and 652b.

In addition, the production control device 300 adds the special figure 1 reserved display 620a and its reserved digestion area 640 to the side surface 652a, and adds the special figure 2 reserved display 630a and its reserved digestion area 640 to the side surface 652b, and the perspective method ( It is displayed on the display screen by the two-point perspective drawing method.

After that, in (Ku 5), the rectangular parallelepiped object disappears, and similarly to (K), in the special display 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game, the variable display area 610 and the variable display area are displayed by the main display and the sub display. 613 is executed.

As described above, in the case of an irregular small hit, the main switching display is used to derive the deviation result of the main variation display game and then the small variation result (first special result) of the subsidiary variation display game is obtained in the main display. It can be switched and displayed. Therefore, the player will not be erroneously recognized as if the main variation display game displayed in a large and conspicuous manner resulted in a small hit result. Further, by the second switching effect, in the main display, it is possible to switch from the small hit result of the subsidiary variable display game to the outlier result of the main variable display game and start the main variable display game. Therefore, the small hit state (ki) and the normal game There is continuity of display with the state (Cou 5), and the discomfort is reduced.

As described above, at the time of shifting from (K-3) to (K-4), the next fluctuation has already started, but not after the start of the next fluctuation, during the small hit digestion time (here Then, the second switching effect may be executed during the aforementioned irregular small hit digestion time). By doing so, the game progresses smoothly. In addition, by doing so, the second switching effect makes the effect slightly different from the normal small hit state (normal small hit state), making it easier to recognize that it is an irregular small hit, and in the effect control device 300. This leads to a reduction in the load of the image processing (the stopped decorative design is lighter in the image processing of the second switching effect than the fluctuating decorative design).

In addition, in (H-1) and (H-4), when a highlighting effect that emphasizes the side surfaces 652a and 652b that are the partitioned display areas is executed, the side surface 652a that is visually recognized to be inclined to the back side by the perspective method. , 652b are easy to understand. Examples of the highlighting effect include illuminating the contours of the side surfaces 652a and 652b or displaying them in a special color (gold color), and displaying an effect image around the side surfaces 652a and 652b.

In addition, in (H-1) and (H-4), by displaying a predetermined image (eg, an arrow, a ball, etc.) on the display screen or operating a movable accessory, a side surface 652a which is a partitioned display region. , 652b, the special figure 1 hold display 620a or the special figure 2 hold display 630a may be subjected to an action effect such as a predetermined image or a character object. Then, in response to the action effect on the special figure 1 hold display 620a or the special figure 2 hold display 630a, a hold change effect in which the mode (color or the like) of the hold display of the object of the effect effect changes from the normal mode may be executed. .. The holding change effect (holding change notice) here may be performed after the holding occurs, not when the holding occurs. The predetermined image may be displayed in the side surfaces 652a and 652b that are partitioned display areas (partition areas), may be displayed across the partitioned areas of the side surfaces 652a and 652b, or may be displayed. The part may be displayed inside the partitioned area of the side surfaces 652a and 652b and the other part may be displayed outside the partitioned area.

Further, when the mode of the special figure 1 hold display 620a is changed by the hold change effect (hold change change notice) during the (K-1) first switching effect, the change also occurs in the (K-4) second switching effect. The special figure 1 hold display 620a in this mode is displayed. That is, in (H-1) to (H-4), the changed state of the special figure 1 hold display 620a is maintained. Similarly, even when the mode of the special figure 2 hold display 630a in (h-1) changes from the normal mode, the special figure 2 hold display 630a once changed from (h-1) to (h-4). Is maintained in a changed manner. As described above, since the once-changed hold display does not return to the original normal state before the change, the player does not erroneously recognize that the hold change is down-ranked, and the interest of the game is not deteriorated.

In addition, when the mode of the special figure 1 hold display 620a is changed by the hold change effect (hold change change notice) during the (K-1) first switch effect, the (K-4) second switch effect is started. It is also possible to return the special figure 1 hold display 620a to the normal mode at the start of the first or second switching effect. With this configuration, especially when the special figure 2 hold display 630a is changed to hold due to a big hit, the special figure 1 hold display 620a is the normal mode in the second switching effect of (K-4), It becomes easy for the player to pay attention to the hold display 630a in FIG.

[Screen transition 2]
156A and 156B is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series with respect to the third embodiment, and is normal in the small hit RUSH state (the second specific game state of FIG. 116). The case where small hits and irregular small hits occur is shown.

Although (a) to (ka) in FIG. 156A correspond to (a) to (f) in FIG. 151A, (ki) to (sa) in FIG. 156B correspond to (ki) to (sa) in FIG. In the winning RUSH state, the main variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game and the subsidiary variable display game becomes the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the opposite of the normal game state.

Therefore, in (a) to (sa) of FIG. 156, unlike (a) to (sa) of FIG. 151, the main display of the main variation display game is not the special figure 1 variation display game, but the special figure 2 variation display. As a game, the special map 2 hold display 630a and its hold exhaustion area 640 are displayed on the display screen (second display unit 630) instead of the special map 1 hold display 620a and its hold exhaustion area 640. In addition, in (a) to (sa) of FIG. 156, the numbers of reservations displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display 660 are the same as those in (a) to (sa) of FIG. 151. It has been replaced.

In addition, in (a) to (a) of FIG. 156, the right hit display 658 is always displayed through the small hit RUSH state, the small hit state, and the big hit state.

[Modification of Third Embodiment]
In this modified example, unlike the above, not only the irregular small hit, but also the normal small hit that occurs from the normal game state, the small hit effect is not executed, and the blessing effect that is performed as part of the small hit effect Not executed

In the hit command processing of FIG. 157, steps B2102, B2106, B2110, B2114 of the hit command processing of FIG. 146 are replaced with steps B2102a, B2106a, B2110a, B2114a. Then, in steps B2102a, B2106a, B2110a, and B2114a, it is determined whether or not it is an irregular small hit, or a small hit from the normal game state. When the determination is "Y", the fanfare effect setting process ( B2103), the round effect setting process (B2107), the interval effect setting process (B2111), and the ending effect setting process (B2115) are not executed.

FIG. 158A is a table exemplifying the presence or absence of a small hit effect and a big hit effect by the hit system command processing with respect to the normal game state (left hit state). Unlike FIG. 147A, even when the result of the main variation display game is a small hit result in the first period (normal small hit), a small hit effect (including a blessing effect) is included in the second period after the first period. Does not run.

On the other hand, in the small hit RUSH state (right hitting state) of FIG. 158B, as in the case of FIG. 147B, in the first period, when the result of the main variable display game (toku-zu 2 variable display game) is the small hit result (normal small hit In the case of a hit), a small hit effect is executed in the second period after the first period.

158A and 158B, in the case of irregular small hit, the small hit effect is not executed, as in FIGS. 147A and 147B.

FIG. 159 is a screen transition diagram according to the present modification, in which only (C) and (D) in FIG. 151A are replaced with (C-1). In (c-1), a normal small hit (small hit in the special display 1 variable display game) has occurred from the normal game state, but a small hit effect such as a small hit fanfare effect or a small hit mid effect is not executed. In (C-1), during the small hit state, the small hit symbol "7,6,7" of the special figure 1 variable display game is largely displayed in the first display mode (main display) in the central portion of the display screen. It's just Note that the large right-handed display 657 may or may not be displayed.

As described above, in the modified example, in the small hit RUSH state (second gaming state), the result of the main variation display game is the small hit result, and when the small hit RUSH state causes the small hit state, a blessing effect is produced. To execute. On the other hand, when the result of the main variation display game is the small hit result in the normal game state (first game state), the blessing effect is not executed when the small hit state occurs from the normal game state.

In this way, by not performing the blessing effect when the small hit state occurs from the normal game state, it is possible to impress the player with the blessing effect when the small hit state occurs from the small hit RUSH state. Depending on the state, you can add sharpness to the performance. In particular, since the small hit RUSH state is a more profitable state for the player than the normal game state, it can be emphasized that the small hit RUSH state is a game state in which the player is profitable.

[Operation and effect of the third embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening 36) or the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening 37). The display device 41 is provided with an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed, and the result of the variable display game is a special result. In this case, a special game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a small hit state or a big hit state) can be generated. Then, in the gaming machine 10, it is recommended that the game balls enter the first starting area, the first starting area becomes the main area (main starting area), and the second starting area becomes the sub area (sub starting area). It is recommended that the first game state (for example, normal game state, left hit state) and game ball enter the second starting area, the second starting area becomes the main area, and the first starting area becomes It is possible to generate a second game state (for example, a small hit RUSH state, a right hitting state) that is a sub-region. The effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the main variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main area, and the subsidiary variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the sub area. It is feasible. Furthermore, when the result of the main variation display game becomes the first special result (for example, a small hit result), the first special game state (for example, a small hit state) occurs, the effect control means (effect control device 300). In the case where the first special game state occurs because the result of the sub variable display game becomes the first special result while the blessing effect of blessing and informing the occurrence of the first special game state is executed. , The blessing effect of blessing and informing the occurrence of the first special game state is not executed.

According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, only when the result of the main variation display game is the first special result (for example, normal small hit), the first special game state (for example, small hit state) is generated. Execute a blessing performance to bless and inform. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game in the original way of playing (how to hit), and the enjoyment of the game is improved. If the blessing effect is executed when the result of the sub variable display game is the first special result (for example, in the case of irregular small hit), the player attempts to generate many sub variable display games and the game balls are generated. Since a game ball is shot aiming at a starting area in which entry of a ball is not recommended, it becomes impossible to enjoy the game in the original way of enjoyment, and a lot of error notifications of how to hit occur.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) causes the first special game state when the result of the sub variable display game becomes the first special result (for example, irregular small hit). In the case of), the result of the main variable display game is the same as the case where the result of the main variation display game is other than the first special result (for example, the small hit result) and the second special result (for example, the big hit result) that is different from the first special result (for example, the case of being off). The display of the contents of the above is displayed on the display device 41.

Therefore, even when the first special game state occurs due to the sub variable display game (for example, in the case of irregular small hits), the result of the main variable display game is an outlier result other than the special result (including chance eye symbol and default symbol). ), the display of the common contents (for example, the special figure 1 hold display 620a, the special figure 1 hold number display 650, the special figure 2 hold number display 660, etc.) can be displayed on the display device 41. Therefore, even if the first special game state (for example, a small hit state due to irregular small hits) due to the sub variable display game occurs, the player can obtain the result of the deviation of the main change display game that is frequently displayed. Since the same display as that in the case is viewed on the display device 41, the user does not feel uncomfortable and is less likely to be confused in the first special game state due to the secondary variable display game that suddenly occurs.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means, when the result of the main variation display game becomes the first special result, so that a first special game state (for example, a small hit state due to a normal small hit) occurs, When the first special game state occurs from the second game state (for example, small hit RUSH state), the blessing effect is executed, but the first special game state occurs from the first game state (for example, normal game state). If you do, do not perform the blessing rendition.

Therefore, when the first special game state (for example, a small hit state) occurs from the first game state (for example, a normal game state), the blessing effect is not executed, so that the second game state (for example, a small hit RUSH state) is changed. The blessing effect when the first special game state (for example, a small hit state) occurs can be impressed on the player, and the effect can be sharpened according to the game state. In particular, when the second game state is more profitable to the player than the first game state, it can be emphasized that the second game state is a game state in which the player is profitable.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means can bring both the main variation display game and the sub-variation display game into a running state. Therefore, the time for digesting the variable display game is increased and the time efficiency is improved. If the sub variable display game (or the main variable display game) is started after waiting for the end of the main variable display game (or the sub variable display game), the time required to consume the variable display game increases and time efficiency is improved. Deteriorate.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means displays the main variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main area more than the subsidiary variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the secondary area. When the main variable display game and the sub variable display game can be in a state of being executed, and the result of the sub variable display game is the first special result (for example, In the case of regular small hits), the main variable display game is ended and the main variable display game is set as a specific result, and the specific result (for example, a miss result) is the first special result (for example, a small hit result) of the sub variable display game. Display larger than.

Therefore, when the result of the sub-variable display game is the first special result, the main variable display game is terminated and the specific result (for example, the disengagement result) of the main variable display game is set to the first special result of the sub-variable display game ( For example, if it is displayed larger than the (small hit result), it is possible to prevent the player from making a mistaken recognition that the main variation display game has the first special result. Although the main variation display game is frequently executed, when the first special result (for example, a small hit result) that suddenly occurs in the sub variation display game that is not frequently executed is conspicuously displayed, it is displayed in a large conspicuous manner. There is a possibility that the player may mistakenly recognize that the main variation display game that had been played had the first special result.

According to the third embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a start storage means capable of storing a start memory which is the right to execute the main variable display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main area. When the result of the sub variable display game is the first special result (for example, in the case of irregular small hit), the effect control means displays the start memory display corresponding to the start memory which is the right to execute the main variable display game. It can be displayed on the device 41.

Therefore, even when the result of the sub variable display game is the first special result (for example, the small hit result), the starting memory display for the main variable display game can be continuously displayed on the display device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the start memory display for the sub variable display game is displayed on the display device 41 and is confused when the result of the sub variable display game becomes the first special result (for example, a small hit result). it can.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means causes the result of the main variation display game or the sub-variation display game to be the second special result (for example, big hit result) different from the first special result (for example, small hit result). When a special game state of 2 (for example, a big hit state) occurs, a display (for example, a right-handed display 657) for recommending the player to enter a game ball into the second starting area is displayed in the first mode (for example, When the first special game state occurs when the result of the sub variable display game becomes the first special result (for example, in the case of irregular small hit), the second start area is displayed. A display (for example, right-handed display 658) for recommending the player to enter a game ball is displayed in a second mode (for example, a small mode) different from the first mode.

Therefore, when the first special game state (for example, a small hit state due to irregular small hits) occurs due to the result of the sub variable display game being the first special result, the second special game state (for example, the big hit state). In a mode (for example, a small mode) that is less conspicuous than the first mode (for example, a large mode) in ), a display for recommending the player to enter a game ball into the second starting area (for example, a right-handed display). Can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the main variation display game that is displayed in a large size has the first special result (for example, a small hit result).

According to the third embodiment, the production control means can execute the main variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main area, and the variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the sub area. The game can be executed, and the main variable display game and the sub variable display game can both be in a running state, and the result of the sub variable display game is the first special result (for example, a small hit result). In such a case, the main variable display game is terminated, the main variable display game is set as a specific result (for example, a result), and the specific result of the main variable display game and the first special result of the sub variable display game are displayed. The switching effect to be switched and displayed at is executed.

Therefore, when the result of the sub-variable display game is the first special result (for example, in the case of irregular small hit), the specific result (for example, the outlier result) of the main variable display game is derived by the switching effect and then the sub-variable display game is performed. It is possible to switch to and display the first special result (for example, a small hit result) of the variable display game. Therefore, the player will not be erroneously recognized as if the main variation display game displayed in a large and conspicuous manner had the first special result (for example, a small hit result). In addition, by the switching effect, the main variation display game can be started by switching from the first special result (for example, the small hit result) of the subsidiary variation display game to the specific result (for example, the outlier result) of the main variation display game, so that continuous display of the display is possible. There is less discomfort.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means can execute the main variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main area, and the subsidiary variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the subsidiary area. Can be executed, and the main variable display game and the sub variable display game can both be in the running state, and when the result of the sub variable display game is the first special result, the main variable display is displayed. The game is interrupted to set the main variable display game as a specific mode, and a switching effect is displayed in which the specific mode of the main variable display game and the first special result of the sub variable display game are switched and displayed on the display device.

Therefore, when the result of the sub variable display game is the first special result (for example, in the case of irregular small hit), the main variable display game is interrupted by the switching effect to specify the main variable display game in a specific mode (for example, , A fluctuation that is different from that before the interruption, such as a fluctuation, can be displayed by switching to the first special result (for example, a small hit result) of the sub variable display game. Therefore, the player will not be erroneously recognized as if the main variation display game displayed in a large and conspicuous manner had the first special result (for example, a small hit result). Further, by the switching effect, the first special result (for example, a small hit result) of the subsidiary variable display game can be switched to a specific mode of the main variable display game, and the main variable display game can be started. Less.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means, the main variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main area, the first display mode (for example, large display mode) and the second display mode (for example, small display mode). It is possible to display on the display device 41 in two modes. Further, the effect control means is capable of displaying the subsidiary variable display game based on the entry of the game ball into the subsidiary area on the display device, and is executing both the main variable display game and the subsidiary variable display game. It can be in a state. When the result of the subsidiary variable display game is the first special result (for example, a small hit result), the main variable display game is ended and the main variable display game is set as a specific result (for example, a miss result). It is not displayed in the 1st display mode, but is displayed on the display device 41 in the 2nd display mode.

Therefore, when the result of the subsidiary variable display game is the first special result (for example, a small hit result), the main variable display game is ended and the specific result (for example, the off result) of the main variable display game is displayed in the second display mode. It is displayed only in (for example, a small display mode) and is not displayed in the first display mode (for example, a large display mode). Therefore, the player will not be erroneously recognized as if the main variation display game displayed in the first display mode had the first special result (for example, a small hit result). Further, if the sub-variable display game based on the entry of the game balls into the sub-region can be displayed on the display device 41 smaller than the main variable display game in the first display mode, the main display in the large first display mode is performed. The player is not erroneously recognized as if the variable display game had the first special result (for example, a small hit result).

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means, the main variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main area, the first display mode (for example, large display mode) and the second display mode (for example, small display mode). It is possible to display on the display device 41 in two modes. Further, the effect control means is capable of displaying the subsidiary variable display game based on the entry of the game ball into the subsidiary area on the display device, and is executing both the main variable display game and the subsidiary variable display game. It can be in a state. When the result of the subsidiary variable display game is the first special result (for example, a small hit result), the main variable display game is interrupted and is not displayed in the first display mode, but is displayed on the display device 41 in the second display mode. To do.

Therefore, when the result of the subsidiary variable display game is the first special result (for example, a small hit result), the main variable display game is interrupted and the second variable display mode (for example, a small display mode) is displayed. It is not displayed in a display mode (for example, a large display mode). Therefore, the player will not be erroneously recognized as if the main variation display game displayed in the first display mode had the first special result (for example, a small hit result). Further, if the sub-variable display game based on the entry of the game balls into the sub-region can be displayed on the display device 41 smaller than the main variable display game in the first display mode, the main display in the large first display mode is performed. The player is not erroneously recognized as if the variable display game had the first special result (for example, a small hit result).

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea thereof, and it is clear that they are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is shown by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of equivalency of the claims.

10 Gaming Machine 12 Front Frame (Game Frame)
25 Production Button 30 Game Board 32 Game Area 36 First Start Winning Port (First Start Winning Area)
37 2nd starting prize hole (2nd starting prize area)
38 1st special variation winning device 39 2nd special variation winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 44 Board production device 46 Board decoration device 50 Collective display device (LED)
100 game control device (main board)
200 payout control device 300 production control device (sub-board)
400 power supply

Claims (1)

Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting area or the second starting area, a production control means capable of displaying a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are displayed in a variable manner is provided, and the result of the variable display game is provided. In the gaming machine that can generate a special game state that is advantageous to the player when is a special result,
A first game state in which a game ball is recommended to enter the first starting area, the first starting area serves as a main area, and the second starting area serves as a sub area,
It is possible to enter a game ball into the second starting area, a second gaming state in which the second starting area serves as a main area and the first starting area serves as a slave area,
The effect control means,
A main variable display game based on the entry of a game ball into the main area can be displayed on the display device in two modes, a first display mode and a second display mode,
It is possible to display, on the display device, a subsidiary variable display game based on the entry of a game ball into the subsidiary area.
It is possible to bring both the main variable display game and the sub variable display game into a running state,
The slave variable display game results Ri Do the first special result, the main variation when temporarily to interrupt the measurement of the display game variations time, the main variable display games varying display before Symbol second display form Continue ,
When the first special game state occurs due to the result of the main variation display game being the first special result in the second game state, the occurrence of the first special game state is celebrated and notified. While performing the blessing production to
When the result of the sub variable display game becomes the first special result in the first game state and the first special game state occurs, congratulate the occurrence of the first special game state. Do not perform the blessing production to inform ,
In the first gaming state, when the result of the main variable display game is the second special result and when the result of the sub variable display game is the second special result, the second special result A game machine characterized in that the same fanfare production can be executed in a period after the display of .

Images